Bus 261 Business Environment and Management

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 258

DISTANCE LEARNING INSTITUTE

UNIVERSITY OF LAGOS

DLI
COURSE MODULE

BUS261

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND


MANAGEMENT
DISTANCE LEARNING INSTITUTE
UNIVERSITY OF LAGOS

DLI
COURSE MODULE

BUS261
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT AND MANAGEMENT
© Distance Learning Institute
University of Lagos 2022
This Publication is made available in
Open Access under the attribution
share Alike 4.0 (CC-BY-SA 4.0) license
(http://creativecommons.org/license/by-sa/4.01).
By using the content of this
publication, users are bound by terms of
use of Distance Learning Institute,
University of Lagos Open Education
Resources.

Published by
Distance Learning Institute
University of Lagos
Akoka-Yaba, Lagos,
Nigeria.
e-mail: directordli@unilag.edu.ng
COURSE DEVELOPMENT TEAM

Authors:
Dr. Alaneme, Gloria C.
Dr. Adebakin, M. A.
Dr. Adekoya, O. A.

Content Editor:
Prof. O.L Kuye

Language Editor:
Dr Yewande Ntekim-Rex

Instructional Designer:
Dr. Esther.O. Oladele

ODL Expert:
Dr. Esther.O.Oladele

i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Welcome Message ................................................................................................................................... xi
1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... xii
a. Course Description ...................................................................................................................... xii
b. Background of the Course...........................................................................................................xiii
c. Module Aims ...............................................................................................................................xiii
2.0 MODULE OUTLINE.......................................................................................................................xiv
a. Learning Objectives .........................................................................................................................xiv
b. Study Sessions .................................................................................................................................xiv
c. Learning Supports............................................................................................................................ xv
d. Module Evaluation ....................................................................................................................... xv
3.0 MODULE DELIVERY SCHEDULE....................................................................................................xvi
a. Session Arrangements.....................................................................................................................xvi
b. Preparation Required in Advance of Sessions ................................................................................xvi
c. Student Engagement...................................................................................................................xvi
d. Preparatory Questions ............................................................................................................... xvii
4.0 ASSESSMENT DETAILS ................................................................................................................ xvii
5.0 GRADING .................................................................................................................................... xvii
6.0 List of Icons and Their Meanings ...................................................................................................... xix
STUDY SESSION 1: ......................................................................................................................................... 1
THE CONCEPT OF BUSINESS .......................................................................................................................... 1
...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Learning Outcomes for Study session 1 .................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Definition of Business ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 The Purpose for business .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Brief history of business development in Nigeria ......................................................................... 3
1.4 Business and Economic Foundations .................................................................................................. 4
1.5 The Nigerian Economy and Business ............................................................................................ 7
1.6 Categorization of Business ............................................................................................................ 9
1.7 Why Study Business .................................................................................................................... 11

ii
Summary of Study Session 1 ................................................................................................................ 11
Self-Assessment Questions for Study Session 1 ..................................................................................... 12
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 13
References and Suggestions for further readings................................................................................... 13
STUDY SESSION 2: ....................................................................................................................................... 15
THE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................... 15
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Learning Outcomes for Study session 2 .................................................................................................. 15
Key Terms: Business Environment, Internal environment, External environment, Organizational
resources, Organizational behaviours, macro-Environment................................................................... 16
2.1 The Concept of the Environment ................................................................................................ 16
2.2 The Concept of Business Environment ...................................................................................... 17
2.3 Components of the Business Environment – An overview ......................................................... 17
2.3.1 Internal Environmental Factors .......................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 External Environmental Factors .......................................................................................... 19
2.4 Importance of understanding the environment ......................................................................... 24
2.5 Characteristics of Business Environment .................................................................................... 26
Summary of Study Session 2 ................................................................................................................... 27
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 2 .......................................................................... 27
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 28
References and Suggestions for futher readings .................................................................................... 28
STUDY SESSION 3: ....................................................................................................................................... 30
OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS AND BUSINESS FAILURE .................................................................................. 30
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 30
Learning Outcomes for Study session 3 .................................................................................................. 31
3.1 What is SWOT?............................................................................................................................ 31
3.2 Identification of Opportunities .................................................................................................. 33
3.2.1 Indicators of Unmet needs.................................................................................................. 34
3.3 Institutionalized sources of business ......................................................................................... 37
3.4 Constraints to the exploitation of business opportunity ............................................................ 38
3.5 Business Failure................................................................................................................................. 39
3.5.1 Micro Causes of Business Failure (Internal) ............................................................................... 39

iii
3.5.2 Macro causes of Business Failure (External) ....................................................................... 42
3.6 Survival for Small Scale Businesses ............................................................................................. 43
Summary of Study Session 3 ................................................................................................................... 43
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 3 .......................................................................... 44
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 45
References/Suggestions for further reading .......................................................................................... 46
STUDY SESSION 4: ....................................................................................................................................... 47
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND BUSINESS ETHICS ......................................................................................... 47
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 47
Learning Outcomes for Study session 4 .................................................................................................. 48
4.1 Definition of Social Responsibility............................................................................................... 48
4.1.1 Basic Assumption about Socially Responsible Business Organization ................................ 49
4.1.2 Is There Really Need for Social Responsibility? .................................................................. 50
4.1.3 Arguments in Favour Of Social Responsibility ........................................................................... 50
4.1.4 Arguments Against .............................................................................................................. 51
4.1.5 Factors Responsible for Consideration of Social Responsibilities by business ................... 53
4.1.6 Interest Groups in Social Responsibility .............................................................................. 54
4.1.7 Benefits of Social Responsibility to the Organisation ................................................................ 56
4.2 Business Ethics ............................................................................................................................ 56
4.2.1 Definition of Ethics .............................................................................................................. 56
4.2.2 Ethics and the Various Aspects of Human Life........................................................................... 57
4.2.3 State of Ethical Standards in Nigeria .................................................................................. 57
4.2.4 Factors Encouraging Compliance to Ethics ................................................................................ 58
4.2.5 Causes of Ethical Compromise and Influences .......................................................................... 59
4.2.6 Ethical Issues in Business ........................................................................................................... 59
4.2.7 Measures to Ensure Ethical Practices Are Followed .................................................................. 61
Summary of Study Session 4 ................................................................................................................... 61
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 4 .......................................................................... 62
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 64
References/Suggestions for Further Readings ....................................................................................... 64
STUDY SESSION 5: ....................................................................................................................................... 65
ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT ......................................................................................................... 65

iv
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 65
Learning Outcomes for Study session 5 .................................................................................................. 65
5.1 What is entrepreneurship? ......................................................................................................... 66
5.2 Who is an entrepreneur? ............................................................................................................ 66
5.3 The History of Entrepreneurship in Nigeria. ............................................................................... 68
5.4 Characteristics of Successful Entrepreneurs .............................................................................. 70
5.5 Nigeria, Youth and Entrepreneurship ......................................................................................... 71
5.6 Role of Government in Entrepreneurship Development in Nigeria .......................................... 72
5.7 Employment and types of employment .................................................................................... 74
5.7.1 Types of Employment ................................................................................................................ 74
5.7.2 Motives for self-employment: ............................................................................................ 75
5.7.3 Advantages of self-employment ......................................................................................... 75
5.8 Success Nuggets for Entrepreneurs ........................................................................................... 76
Summary of Study Session 5 ................................................................................................................... 77
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 5 .......................................................................... 77
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 78
References/Suggestions for Further Readings ....................................................................................... 79
STUDY SESSION 6: ....................................................................................................................................... 80
ORGANIC FUNCTIONS AND FEASIBILITY ..................................................................................................... 80
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 80
Learning Outcomes for Study session 6 .................................................................................................. 80
6.1 The Organic Functions of Business ................................................................................................... 81
6.1.1 The Marketing Function ...................................................................................................... 81
6.1.2 The Production Function ..................................................................................................... 83
6.1.3 The Finance Function ............................................................................................................... 85
1.1.4 The Human Resources Function ......................................................................................... 86
6.2 Feasibility Study and Business .......................................................................................................... 87
6.2.1 Role or Uses of Feasibility Study ......................................................................................... 88
6.2.2 Contents of a Business Feasibility Study ............................................................................. 89
Summary of Study Session 6 ................................................................................................................... 92
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 6 .......................................................................... 93
Multiple Choice Questions .................................................................................................................... 93

v
Links to OERs ........................................................................................................................................... 95
References/Suggestions for further reading .......................................................................................... 95
STUDY SESSION 7: ....................................................................................................................................... 96
CHALLENGES OF MANAGING BUSINESS IN NIGERIA .................................................................................. 96
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 96
Learning Outcomes for Study session 7 .................................................................................................. 96
7.1 Definition .................................................................................................................................... 97
7.2 Types of Business Organization .................................................................................................. 99
7.3 Factors militating against Business Operations in Nigeria ........................................................ 101
Summary of Study Session 7 ................................................................................................................. 109
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 7 ........................................................................ 109
Links to OERs ......................................................................................................................................... 110
References and Suggestions for further reading .................................................................................. 110
STUDY SESSION 8: ..................................................................................................................................... 112
OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS, AND BUSINESS FAILURE ............................................................................... 112
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 112
Learning Outcomes for Study session 8 ................................................................................................ 113
Key Terms: Strength, weakness, threats, opportunities ....................................................................... 113
8.1 What is SWOT?................................................................................................................................ 113
8.2 Identification of Opportunities ....................................................................................................... 116
8.2.1 Indicators of Unmet needs................................................................................................ 117
8.3 Institutionalized sources of business .............................................................................................. 120
8.4 Constraints to the exploitation of business opportunity .......................................................... 121
8.5 Business Failure............................................................................................................................... 121
8.5.1 Micro Causes of Business Failure (Internal) ............................................................................. 121
8.5.2 Macro causes of Business Failure (External) ..................................................................... 124
8.6 Survival for Small Scale Businesses ........................................................................................... 125
Summary of Study Session 8 ................................................................................................................. 125
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 8 ........................................................................ 126
Links to OERs ......................................................................................................................................... 128
References/Suggestions for further reading ........................................................................................ 128
STUDY SESSION 9: ..................................................................................................................................... 129

vi
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND BUSINESS ETHICS ....................................................................................... 129
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 129
Learning Outcomes for Study session 9 ................................................................................................ 130
9.1 Definition of Social Responsibility............................................................................................. 130
9.1.1 Basic Assumption about Socially Responsible Business Organisation .............................. 131
9.1.2 Is There Really Need For Social Responsibility? ................................................................ 132
9.3 Arguments in Favour of Social Responsibility ................................................................................. 132
9.1.4 Arguments Against ............................................................................................................ 133
9.1.5 Factors Responsible for Consideration of Social Responsibilities by business ................. 135
9.16 Interest Groups in Social Responsibility .................................................................................... 136
9.1.7 Benefits of Social Responsibility to the Organisation .............................................................. 138
9.2 Business Ethics .......................................................................................................................... 138
9.2.1 Definition of Ethics ............................................................................................................ 138
9.2.2 Ethics and the Various Aspects of Human Life......................................................................... 139
9.2.3 State of Ethical Standards in Nigeria ................................................................................ 139
9.2.4 Factors Encouraging Compliance to Ethics .............................................................................. 140
9.2.5 Causes of Ethical Compromise and Influences ........................................................................ 141
9.2.6 Ethical Issues in Business ......................................................................................................... 141
9.2.7 Measures to Ensure Ethical Practices Are Followed ................................................................ 143
Summary of Study Session 9 ................................................................................................................. 143
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 9 ........................................................................ 144
Links to OERs ......................................................................................................................................... 146
References and Suggestions for further Reading ................................................................................. 146
STUDY SESSION 10: ................................................................................................................................... 148
GOVERNMENT ROLE AND ECONOMIC POLICIES ...................................................................................... 148
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 148
Learning Outcomes for Study session 10 .............................................................................................. 149
10.1 Economic Systems......................................................................................................................... 149
10.1.1 The Role of Government in Business ..................................................................................... 151
10.1.2 Why do Governments Regulate/Control Business?.......................................................... 152
10.1.3 Methods of Control ........................................................................................................... 152
10. 2 Nigeria Enterprises Promotion Decree (NEPD) ............................................................................ 153

vii
10.2.1 Objectives of Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree ..................................................... 155
10.2.2 Benefits of the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree .................................................. 155
10.2.3 A Revised Economic Climate ............................................................................................. 156
10.3 Structural Adjustment Programme ........................................................................................... 156
10.4 Commercialization .................................................................................................................... 159
10.4.1 Objectives of Commercialization ..................................................................................... 160
10.4.2 Assessment of Commercialization Programmes in Nigeria .............................................. 160
10.5 Privatization ............................................................................................................................. 161
10.5.1 Types or Methods of Privatization .................................................................................... 162
Summary of Study Session 10 ............................................................................................................... 164
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 10 ...................................................................... 164
Links to OERs ......................................................................................................................................... 166
References/Suggestions for further readings ....................................................................................... 166
STUDY SESSION 11: ................................................................................................................................... 168
GOVERNMENT ECONOMIC POLICIES AND PARTNERSHIPS ...................................................................... 168
.................................................................................................................................................................. 168
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 168
Learning Outcomes for Study session 11 .............................................................................................. 168
11.1 National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS) ............................. 169
11.1.1 What Made NEEDS Different ............................................................................................ 171
11.1.2 Empowerment programme .............................................................................................. 171
11.1.3 Assessment of the Success of the NEEDS Programme .......................................................... 172
11.2 The New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD) ........................................................ 173
11.2.1 History of NEPAD .............................................................................................................. 173
11.2.2 Objectives of NEPAD ......................................................................................................... 174
11.2.3 The principles of NEPAD.................................................................................................... 175
11.2.4 The elements of NEPAD's strategic focus ......................................................................... 175
11.2.5 How NEPAD programme is governed .................................................................................... 176
11.2.6 NEPAD Planning and Coordinating Agency (NEPAD Agency)........................................... 176
11.2.7 African Ownership ............................................................................................................ 177
11.3 The African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA) .................................................................... 178
11.3.1 Long-Term Potential Benefits of AGOA to African Countries ........................................... 179

viii
11.3.2 Implementation ................................................................................................................ 180
11.3.3 Country Eligibility .............................................................................................................. 180
11.3.4 GSP Product Eligibility ...................................................................................................... 181
11.3.5 Apparel Provisions ............................................................................................................ 182
Summary of Study Session11 ................................................................................................................ 183
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 11 ...................................................................... 184
Links OERs ............................................................................................................................................. 185
References/Suggestions for further reading ........................................................................................ 185
STUDY SESSION 12: ................................................................................................................................... 188
BUSINESS AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES .................................................................................................. 188
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 188
Learning Outcomes for Study session 12 .............................................................................................. 188
12.1 Concept of International Trade................................................................................................. 189
12.1.1 Reasons for international trade ........................................................................................ 189
12.1.2 Advantages of International Trade ................................................................................... 189
12.1.3 Disadvantages of International trade ............................................................................... 190
12.1.4 Barriers to International trade ............................................................................................... 190
12.1.5 Documents used in International Trade ........................................................................... 190
12.1.6 Means of payment in foreign trade .................................................................................. 191
12.1.7 Advantages of the letter of credit ..................................................................................... 191
12.1.8 Disadvantages of the letter of credit ................................................................................ 192
12.2 Globalisation ............................................................................................................................. 192
12.2.1 Advantages of Globalization ............................................................................................. 192
12.2.2 Disadvantages of Globalisation ......................................................................................... 193
12.2.3 Features of the world that aid globalization. .................................................................... 193
12.4 Regional Economic Integration ................................................................................................. 194
12.4.1 Advantages/Reasons ......................................................................................................... 194
12.4.2 Disadvantages/Problems .................................................................................................. 194
12.4.3 Types of economic unions ..................................................................................................... 195
12.5 The Economic Community of West African State (ECOWAS) ................................................... 195
12.6 General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT) ..................................................................... 196
12.6.1 Basic Principles of GATT .................................................................................................... 196

ix
12.6.2 Objectives of GATT ............................................................................................................ 196
12.6.3 Specific areas of agreement .............................................................................................. 197
12.7 World Trade Organization (WTO) ............................................................................................ 197
12.7.1 Objectives of WTO ............................................................................................................ 198
12.7.2 Functions of WTO.............................................................................................................. 198
12.8 The World Bank......................................................................................................................... 198
12.8.1 Groups of World Bank ....................................................................................................... 199
12.9 International Monetary Fund (IMF) .......................................................................................... 199
12.9.1 Composition of IMF............................................................................................................... 200
12.9.2 Features oF IMF ................................................................................................................ 200
12.9.3 Mode of operation ............................................................................................................ 201
12.9.4 Objectives of the IMF ........................................................................................................ 202
Summary of Study Session 12 ............................................................................................................... 202
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 12 ...................................................................... 203
Links to OERs ......................................................................................................................................... 205
References/Suggestions for Further readings ...................................................................................... 205
APPENDIX 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 207
SOLUTIONS TO SELF_ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS FOR SESSIONS 1 to 12................................................... 207
APPENDIX 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 233
GLOSSARY OF KEYWORDS......................................................................................................................... 233

x
Welcome Message
Good day to you and we are delighted to welcome you to this study guide on the Course BUS 261:

Management of Business Environment As your instructor for this course, we are looking

forward to working together with you and helping you to get the best head start in this course. We

want, once again, to welcome you warmly and wish you well.

This Self-Learning Material (SLM) for the course has been specifically designed to help you

acquire a significant aspect of the skills you need to succeed in your dream to acquire a degree of

the University of Lagos. We hope also that you will maximize the opportunities provided through

the material in this direction. and complete this course leading to your degree programme. Read

through the course outline carefully to learn what is expected of you.

We wish you the best.

Dr. Alaneme, Gloria C.


Dr. Adebakin, M. A.
Dr. Adekoya, O. A.

xi
1.0 INTRODUCTION

You are welcome to Management of Business Environment (BUS 261) module. Generally, this

course fundamentally aims to introduce you to Management and Business Environment as a

discipline. The module is specifically designed to introduce you to virtually all areas of business

operations like the different forms of business organizations, rules and regulations guiding

business operations, the environment of business, societal expectation of business, etc. It gives a

general background to the elements and the characteristics of managing business and its

environment.

At the end of each module, there are self-assessment questions for you to practice with; to test

your understanding of what you have read in each module.

a. Course Description

The goal of this course is to make you understand the fundamentals of managing business and the

concerns about the environment of business. Because of its wide coverage, the field of business

environment looks at the external and internal environment. The external environment looks at

the general and international environment while the internal environment is concerned with the

specific environment or the task environment of Nigeria. This course essentially introduces

students to basic rudiments of the Nigerian business environment. It is the bedrock for you to

understand what management of business environment is as a course. The content of the course

and reading references provided will cover some areas of the course; while lectures, class

discussions and teamwork, cover the rest areas of the bulk of knowledge you are expected to

acquire and complete through this course; and by extension, this course will be helpful to you in

providing a window through which you learn the background to other courses on the programme

xii
and other useful principles required to make a successful business manager.

b. Background of the Course

a. This module is specifically designed to equip you with relevant academic skills that are
supportive of your excellent class performance. For example, Study Session 1 to 5 exposes
you to what business and business environment is, the components of business
environment, types of environments, how to analyze the environment of business, types of
business organization and ownership, advantages and disadvantages of the various forms
of business ownership, what entrepreneurship is, characteristics of successful
entrepreneurs, among others.

b. You will soon discover by paying attention to the basic principles taught in these study
sessions how important this course is in providing the necessary skills you require in
understanding business environment and management. You will therefore require
dedication to your work and acquisition of relevant academic skills to excel brilliantly.
There are necessary supports provided by the Distance Learning Institute (DLI) tutor
through the assignments given in these study sessions.

c. Module Aims

The main aim of this module is to develop the relevant key study skills in you. Note that your
tutors are just a click of the button away from you to give you the support you require.
This course will seek to:
• develop students in broad range areas.
• develop students specifically in: -
o Critical thinking and problem-solving skills.
o Accessing and analyzing information skills.
o Effective communication skills

xiii
2.0 MODULE OUTLINE

a. Learning Objectives

On completion of this module, you should be able to:


Define the concept of Business.
Discuss the Business Environment.
Discuss Business and environmental interdependence.
Describe the forms of Business ownership
Examine Entrepreneurship Development.
Discuss Organic Business Functions and Feasibility Study.
Discuss the challenges of managing business in Nigeria
Identify the opportunities and threats of business.
Determine the reasons for business failure
Analyze social responsibility and business ethics
Examine the role of government and economic policies
Discuss government economic policies and partnerships
Examine Business and Contemporary issues

b. Study Sessions

This study guide should be read in conjunction with the Module in print by the same author, which
will be provided to all students. In addition to this module, students are encouraged to consult
additional recommended reading materials such as textbook and websites on the subject matter.
The following topics are covered in the module:

Study Session 1: Concept of Business


Study Session 2: Business Environment
Study Session 3: Business and Environmental Interdependence
Study Session 4: Forms of Business ownership
Study Session 5: Entrepreneurship Development
Study Session 6: Organic Functions and Feasibility Studies
Study Session 7: Challenges of Managing Business in Nigeria

xiv
Study Session 8: Opportunities, Threats and Business Failure
Study Session 9: Social Responsibility and Business Ethics
Study Session 10: Government Role and Economic Policies
Study Session 11: Government Economic Policies and Partnerships
Study Session 12: Business and Contemporary Issues

c. Learning Supports

This study guide and the Self Learning Material (SLM) are the key materials for studying the
relevant study sessions. Each topic provides you with a 'road map' to guide you through the SLM.
The textbook readings will be supplemented by lecture notes. You are also expected to attempt the
online activities on the Learning Management System (LMS) as they will deepen your
understanding of the individual topics. Online discussions and collaborations are additional vital
parts of the learning support tools. They give you the opportunity to express your understanding
and application of the topics under discussion in practice. Furthermore, you benefit from the
experiences and insights of your peers challenging their own perspectives and actions.

There is availability of other useful sources such as numerous websites which are appropriate
for this course. The following list is by no means exhaustive but should be explored:

http://www.skills4study.com
http://www.ucd.ie/adulted/currentstudents/studyskillsguide/
http://www.mindmapping.com/

d. Module Evaluation

At the end of the session, you will be asked to provide feedback on this course guide through an
online evaluation that will be sent to your email account. The gathering of such feedback is an
important part of our quality assurance and accreditation processes, and I would encourage you to
complete these evaluations.

xv
3.0 MODULE DELIVERY SCHEDULE

a. Session Arrangements

The module contains fifteen study sessions, and you are encouraged to spend at least three (3)
hours on individual study sessions. The module is programmed for you to engage in prior
preparation, to seek confirmation and clarification at appropriate periods, to practice each In-Text
Questions (ITQs) and Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) at the end of each study session and to
be actively engaged during the session. The ITQs are short questions that give you an immediate
opportunity to assess yourself before going to study the next session. You are expected to study
and be prepared for all sessions. The study sessions are divided into weekly format as will be seen
on the LMS.

b. Preparation Required in Advance of Sessions

This is a 3-unit course which means that you are required to study and take all parts of the course
seriously. In addition to the SLM assignments, you are expected to have read the study sessions in
advance of online facilitations. BUS 261 being a 3-unit course and the workload reflects that fact.
It is essential to set out your study schedule so that you can plan your learning activities for the
academic year ahead with the aim of balancing study, work, and family demands. You are expected
to be fully familiar with the contents of the module.

c. Student Engagement

During the sessions, you are expected to be able to discuss issues arising from the study. Session
participation is a vital element in the design of this Self Learning Material. Therefore, you are
expected to engage in class discussion and online collaborations to facilitate the formation of your
critical judgments. To support your learning, Power-Point slides will be available which (on certain
occasions) may need to be upgraded / modified during or following the sessions depending on the
issues raised.

xvi
d. Preparatory Questions

There two types of Assessments in this module; the In-Text Questions (ITQs) and Self-Assessment
Questions (SAQs). The In-Text Answers (ITAs) follow directly after the ITQs. Going through
these gives you the opportunities to quickly assess yourself before moving to the next session. The
ITQs come immediately after a sub-topic but you will find the SAQs at the end of each study
session. Answering SAQs enable you to check your own progress in achieving the Learning
Outcomes.

4.0 ASSESSMENT DETAILS


In every course undertaken there will always be a form of assessment. Assessment is to assist in
evaluating the extent to which you have successfully completed in studying the content of the
module. This module has three assignments with equal marks. Each will come after/during every
five-week of facilitation with you.
You will be exposed to other forms of assessments in form of Computer Marked Assessments
(CMA) and Tutor Marked Assessments (TMA). Endeavour to submit all assignments via the
relevant assignment upload link on the LMS which can be located under the ‘Assignments’ section
of the course page before/ on the due date for submission. You are expected to complete all
assignments ensuring that they are submitted by the specified date. Please take part in all TMA
and CMA before the due dates. Do not wait until the last minute before participating in the
assessment activities.

5.0 GRADING
Your programme is designed with courses which are weighted and classified into various levels.
Courses are assigned units depending on the volume of work required to complete the course. This
section is designed to acquaint you with the alphabets representing your final grade in this course.
It is necessary to first recognize and be thoroughly familiar with certain ranges that are commonly
used in arriving at your grade. These are defined as follows:
Grade Percentage range Grade point
A (70-100%) 5 points
B (60-69%) 4 points

xvii
C (50-59%) 3 points
D (45-49%) 2 points
E (40-44%) 1 point
F (0-39%) 0 point

xviii
6.0 List of Icons and Their Meanings
S/No Icon Meaning
1.
Activity

2.
Calculations

3.
Charts and Tables

4.
Experiments

5. Group Activity

6.
IAG Information

7.
In-Text Questions

8.
In-Text Answers

9.
Introduction

10.
Learning Outcomes

11.
Summary

12.
E-Tutor

13.
Figure

14.
Key Terms

xix
STUDY SESSION 1:

THE CONCEPT OF BUSINESS

Introduction

Are you a businessman or woman? Can you think of any businessman or woman you know? Do

you know what businessmen and or women do even if you are not one? Your response would

probably be that they engage in trading or buying and selling? Well then, let us see what this unit

has in stock. In this unit you will learn the concept and definition of business, state the purpose of

business while an insight will be drawn into the Nigerian economy and business objectives and the

classification of business will also be dealt with.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 1

When you have studied this session, you should be able to:
1.1. Define and correctly use all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 1.4)

1.2. Define Business and State the Purpose of Business (SAQ 1.4)

1.3. Explain the Nigerian Economy and Business (SAQ 1.1)

1.4. Summarise the Business Economic foundations (SAQ 1.3)

1.5. Describe the different Categories or Classification of Business (SAQ 1. 2)

Key Terms: Business, Nigerian Economy, Economics, Business Development,


Extractive, Manufacturing, Construction, Commercial and Service Industries

1
1.1 Definition of Business
Business has been defined in various ways by various schorlars. Some authors have defined
Business as “an organisation set up to make profit”; others described it as “an organization
consisting of a person or a group of persons who produce and distribute goods and services for
private profit”. It has also been viewed as an economic system in which goods and services are
exchanged for one another or money, based on their perceived worth (BusinessDictionary.com,
2010). Karimu (1992) defines Business as “the sum of all the activities involved in the creation
and distribution of goods and services for private profit”. It is also conceived as a legally
recognized organization. Business could be referred to as: an enterprise, business enterprise,
commercial enterprise, company, firm, organization, profession or trade operated for the purpose
of earning a profit by providing goods or services, or both to consumers, businesses and
governmental entities (Sullivan and Sheffrin, 2003; AllBusiness.com., 2010). Business is therefore
any legal means of satisfying human wants with the motive of profit. When people engage in illicit
deals and make abnormal income it is not business. When people engage in criminal and fraudulent
activities to enrich themselves it is not business. Business must be seen as rendering legal services
or producing goods at a cost.

Define Business by Karimu (1992)

Karimu (1992) defines Business as “the sum of all the activities involved in the creation

and distribution of goods and services for private profit”.

1.2 The Purpose for business


Every human activity has a purpose or else it will not be useful. I am sure you have a purpose for

living or you are living to fulfil a purpose. Likewise, the major essence or purpose of business is

the supply of goods and services in order to satisfy the societal needs (Isimoya, 2005). The

aggregation of people in a place will necessitate the need for goods and services. Needs, going by

Abram Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, could be physiological, psychological security,

social/belongingness, esteem or self-actualization. It is expected that these needs will be provided

by the institutions best suited to provide them. For instance, essential and infrastructural needs

2
will be provided by the state (local, state, and federal), belongingness or friendship needs will be

provided by the family and the society one belongs to, spiritual need which may fall under social,

or belongingness need will be supplied by the church etc. In the same vein, business will provide

economic goods and services to satisfy human wants. These human wants may cut across the

various hierarchy of needs as stated by Abram Maslow and the others. For instance,

businesspeople who are into the manufacturing of cars realized the importance of class and status

distinction (esteem needs) and decided to segment the market for cars. The richest of the rich go

for the hummer cars and the likes, while the poor go for fairly used (tokunbo) cars and the likes.

The motives for satisfying needs by the various institutions differ. As you know, an institution like

the church is spiritually motivated, government is politically motivated, while business is profit

motivated. A business cannot long exist if it does not make profit to enhance its existence. Possibly

the first few months of business operation may not see the profit rolling in, but for its long-term

sustenance and existence, it must make profit. Every institution therefore serves a purpose in terms

of need satisfaction.

You have just learnt the meaning of business. Do you think someone hired to kill
another for a pay is into business?

No. Hire killing for a pay is an illegal deal and does not reflect the true meaning of

business.

1.3 Brief history of business development in Nigeria

Trade or business is as old as man itself. In the primitive era or Stone Age, individual family units

provided goods and services through what is called trade by barter where someone who needs meat

exchanges his own produce, say yam with a hunter who probably requires the yam. The means for

exchange today is through the accepted Nigerian currency or any other currency in which the

business is transacted. In the pre-colonization era, trade went on successfully in the historical

3
kingdom or empires such as Kanem-Bornu, Oyo and Benin. The economy thrived on agriculture,

craft and commercial activities. Trans-saharan trade also flourished with the Portuguese where

nations traded in commodities such as gold, ivory, kolanuts, salt, shares, in exchange for items that

were brought in by the Portuguese. When Britain colonized Nigeria, trade with the British was

bolstered while the British industrialists needed raw materials such as palm oil, groundnuts, and

cocoa (which were cheaply produced in West Africa) for their industries. They also needed trading

outlets, i.e. commercial opportunities for their finished goods. The nation’s economic and trading

activities were controlled by the Europeans. With the indigenization decree of 1972 and

government’s direct involvement in ownership of business, the control has shifted from Europeans

to Nigerians (Isimoya, 2005). The Nigeria Enterprises Promotion Decree of December 1989

permits a 100% foreign ownership in any new venture except those involved in the production of

arms and ammunitions (UHY,

2008). The Nigeria Free Trade Zone Act established the Nigerian Export Processing Zone

Authority (NEPZA). In the Free Trade Zones (FTZ’s), as renamed in 2001, all products and

services are designated for export with specific exceptions . Enterprise zones are exempted from

custom duties, local taxes and foreign exchange restrictions, and qualify for incentives – tax

holidays, rent free land, no strikes or lockouts, no quotas in the EU or US markets (UHY, 2008).

1.4 Business and Economic Foundations


Economics is the study of how resources are distributed for the production of goods and services

within a social system (Ferrell, Hirt and Ferrell, 2008). The types of resources available as you

know are the natural resources, human resources and financial resources. The natural resources

include land, forests, minerals, water, and other things that are not made by people; the human

resources which is essentially labour is the physical and mental abilities that people use to produce

goods and services. People working in an organization are the human resources of that

organisation. Financial resources referred to as capital are the funds used to acquire the natural and

4
human resources needed to provide products. These resources are also called the factors of

production because they are used to produce goods and services.

Economic Systems

An economic system describes how a given society distributes its resources to produce goods and

services. What is important in economics is how to satisfy the unlimited yearning for goods and

services in a world of limited or scarce supply of resources. Different economic systems attempt

to resolve this basic issue in diverse ways. The various economic systems though different in the

handling of the distribution of resources must address three crucial issues as expressed by Ferrell

et al (2008) thus;

1. What goods and services to be produced, and how much of each will satisfy consumers’

needs?

2. How goods and services will be produced, who will produce them, and with what resources
will they be produced? and
3. How are the goods and services to be distributed to the consumers?

There are basically three types of economic systems found in the world today. These are

Communism, Socialism, and Capitalism.

Communism by Karl Marx (1818-1883) was first described as a society in which the people,

without regard to class, own all the nation’s resources. In Karl Marx’ ideal political-economic

system, everyone contributes according to ability and receives benefits according to need. In this

type of economy, the people (through the government) own and operate all business and factors of

production. Central government planning determines what goods and services satisfy citizens’

needs, how the goods and services are produced, and how they are distributed. This system was

previously practiced in Russia, Poland, Hungary, and other Eastern European nations. However,

no true communist economy exists today that satisfies Marx’s ideal. Or can you name one?

Socialism is closely related to communism. Socialism is an economic system in which the

government owns and operates basic industries such as postal service, telephone, utilities,

5
transportation, health care, banking, and some manufacturing, but individuals own most

businesses. Central planning determines what basic goods and services are produced, how they

are produced, and how they are distributed. Individuals and small businesses provide other goods

and services based on consumer demand and the availability of resources. As with communism,

citizens are dependent on the government for many goods and services. Examples of socialist

nations are Sweden, India, and Israel. They are democratic and recognize basic individual

freedoms. Citizens can vote for political offices, but central government planners usually make

decisions about what is best for the nation.

Capitalism or free enterprise is an economic system in which individuals own and operate the

majority of businesses that provide goods and services. Competition, supply, and demand

determine which goods and services are produced, how they are produced, and how they are

distributed. The United States, Canada, Japan, and Australia are examples of economic systems

based on capitalism. There are two forms of capitalism: pure capitalism and modified capitalism.

In pure capitalism also called a free-market system, all economic decisions are made without

government intervention. This economic system was first described by Adam Smith in “the Wealth

of Nations” (1776). Smith, often called the father of capitalism, believed that the invisible hand of

competition best regulates the economy. On the other hand, modified capitalism states that the

government intervenes and regulates business to some extent. One way of doing this is through

enactment of laws and policies on the economy. This can be viewed as what is referred to in today’s

world as the Mixed Economies. No country practices a pure form of communism, socialism, or

capitalism, although most tend to favour one system over the others. Most nations operate as mixed

economies, which have elements from more than one economic system.

Each nation develops along one economic system or the other. Can you say on
which system Nigerian’s economy is built?

6
Nigeria’s economic system is built on modified capitalism or mixed economic

system because government intervenes and regulates business to some extent.

1.5 The Nigerian Economy and Business


Remember that in the preceding section, you were asked to name Nigeria’s economic system. Now

study it in the following segment.

Nigeria runs a mixed economy which is an economic system that is in between a capitalist (free

market or free enterprise) economy and a socialist (pure planned) economy. A mixed economy

entails that the government accepts a degree of ownership of the means of production, e.g. land

and capital, and also influences the key economic variables like interest rate, exchange rate and the

maintenance of sound financial regulations. Government is also involved in direct supply of

utilities like water, electricity, roads, power, postal services, telecommunication, etc. These are

vital economic institutions whose activities are very basic to the total economic system.

Government involvement in the provision of goods and services (both as commercially-oriented

as well as socially-oriented) is stated in the Nigerian Second National Development Plan (1970-

74:75) where the reason for public enterprise or state owned enterprise establishment is given thus:

Their (Public enterprise) primary purpose is to stimulate and accelerate


National economic development under conditions of capital scarcity and
structural defects in private business organizations. There are
also basic considerations arising from the dangers of leaving vital
sectors of the national economy to the whims of the private sector
often under the direct and remote controls of foreign large scale
industrial companies.
The mixed economy also has its legal backing in the 1979 Nigerian Constitution which states that

“the state shall control the national economy in such a manner as to secure the maximum welfare,

freedom and happiness of every citizen on the basis of social justice, equality of status, and

opportunity; the state shall manage the major sectors of the economy (defence, currency,

7
export/import, aviation, military, railway, mineral resources, etc., and may take active part in other

sectors like education, electricity, water resources, agriculture, etc)”.

It is evident from the above, that in Nigeria the state and her agencies, as well as the private

investors, are involved in the supply of goods and services that meet the society’s needs. The

objective of the state obviously is to promote maximum welfare, freedom and happiness, as stated

in the constitution, while that of private business investors is to maximize profit. The effect of

government objective is felt in the provision of essential services, infrastructural facilities, and

employment opportunities among others. Aside from the generally accepted profit motive of

private business, Isimoya (2005) states that there are other objectives of business and this include:

i. Innovation: introduction of new products or services

ii. Productivity: Business aims at enhancing productivity i.e. the ratio of input to output.

An increase in productivity can be measured in terms of output per labour employed,

and output per capital employed, which show the extent to which the business is able

to effectively utilize a set of resources to achieve the highest possible value of output.

iii. Employees’ satisfaction: Business seeks to enhance employees’ satisfaction, so as to

optimize contributions to business well-being.

iv. Shareholders’ Satisfaction: increase in dividends and reduction in business risk

exposures.

v. Social responsibility: Business aims at identifying with the locality in which it

operates.

vi. Stakeholders’ Satisfaction: Apart from employees and shareholders who are directly

involved in the running of business, there are other stakeholders every business outfit

strives to satisfy, such as:

- Consumers: These are people who buy the goods and services produced.

- Suppliers: They supply the inputs to business

- Distributors: They distribute the goods produced by business

8
- Government: The government legally regulates the business operations so that

individual’s rights would not be infringed upon.

- Pressure Groups/General Public: They are the recipients of all that the business

produces and assess the positive and possible negative impacts on the society.

1.6 Categorization of Business

Business has been classified in various ways by various people. In this study, business shall be

classified using the type of customers, type of goods produced, and industry characteristics as

stated by Isimoya (2005).

a. Type of customers: The customers of a business may either be end-users or those who use

the products to further their own production. In this case, the output of one business

becomes the input of another. For instance, an ice block producer will require nylon

produced by plastic companies to be able to fill water in it and produce ice block. In a

situation like this, the former, whose output is used as input by the other, is an

intermediate/industrial goods producer while the other whose product goes to the end-users

are called consumer goods producers. From the example given, the nylon producer is an

intermediate/industrial goods producer while the ice block producer could be termed the

consumer goods producer.

b. Type of Goods Produced: Business can be classified according to the kind of goods

produced. Some business produce goods that are termed durable or specialty goods, e.g.

machines, electrical appliances, motor vehicles, aeroplanes, etc., while other firms produce

non-durable or convenience goods that are consumed within relatively short periods of

time, such as food items, cigarettes and paper products.

c. Industry Type: Businesses can be classified by industry characteristics thus:

i) Extractive Industry: This is a group of business firms whose primary activities

involve mining, fishing, forestry, farming, quarrying, drilling, etc.

9
ii) Manufacturing Industry: This is composed of businesses whose primary purpose

is to convert items (goods) in the crude state to a more useful state. The

manufacturing group gets the inputs (raw materials) from the extractive industry,

and then processes either by reshaping or refining them to enhance their utility.

iii) Construction Industry: This comprises businesses involved in building

infrastructure like roads, bridges, houses, office blocks, seaports and airports,

stadia, to mention but a few.

iv) Commercial Industry: The activities engaged in these organizations serve as

facilitators of business. Examples are the banks, insurance companies, wholesale

and retail trade organizations, real estate companies, transportation firms, etc.

v) Service Industry: This is another segment of business in our country. The service

industry is growing in importance with every passing day. Unlike the basic

industries, the service industry does not produce physical goods, yet it is very

productive through services which are demanded and paid for by consumers and

businesses alike. Examples are entertainment and recreation, hotels and lodging,

laundry and general cleaning, engineering and other professional services, as well

as automobile repair. Others are educational institutions, religious and social

organizations, medical and health services business and domestic services.

Supposing your company decides to engage in the cleaning of offices for other
companies and individuals for a pay, what kind of industry does that fall within and
how many ways can you classify your kind of business?

The cleaning business will fall under the service industry, and can be classified

using the industry type or customers’ type.

10
1.7 Why Study Business

Every purposeful activity must have a reason. For example you must have a reason for enrolling

in a degree programme. You must also have a reason for choosing business administration as

a course of study. Can you state your reason for studying business? Read further. Studying

business can help you develop skills and acquire knowledge to prepare for your future career,

regardless of whether you plan to work for a multinational firm, start your own business, work

for a government agency, or manage or volunteer at a non-profit organization (Ferrell, Hirt &

Ferrell, 2008). The business field offers a variety of interesting and challenging career

opportunities throughout the world such as human resources management, finance, production

and operations, wholesaling and retailing and many more.

The study of business helps us to understand better the many business activities that are

necessary to provide satisfying goods and services and that these activities have their cost. For

instance, most businesses charge a reasonable price for their products to ensure that they cover

their production costs, pay their employees, provide their owners with a return on their

investment, and perhaps give something back to their local communities.

The activities of business help generate the profits that are essential not only to individual

business and local economies but also to the good or betterment of the world at large. Without

profit, business will find it difficult, if not impossible to expand its scope, buy more raw

materials, hire more employees, attract more capital, and create additional products that in turn

make more profits and fuel the global economy.

Summary of Study Session 1

In this Study Session, you have learnt:


1) the concept of business and the various definitions of business. Business was defined as
any legal means of satisfying human wants with the aim of making profit.

11
2) The purpose for the business includes the provision of goods and services with a profit
motive as well as satisfying other stakeholders.
3) the brief history of business development in Nigeria as well as the economic foundations
of business and the various economic systems was briefly examined. Business was
categorized according to its customer type, good or product type, and industry
characteristics.
4) about the Nigerian Economy and Business and the Business Economic foundations
5) how to describe the different Categories or Classification of Business

Self-Assessment Questions for Study Session 1


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 1.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.3)


Give a brief account of the Nigerian economy and business
SAQ 1.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.5)
Write short notes of not more than three sentences each on the different categories or classification
of business
SAQ 1.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.4)
Outline and illustrate the economic foundations of business
SAQ 1.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.1 and 1.2)
Define Business and state the purpose of business
Multiple Choice Questions

1.1 ................ is a group of business firms whose primary activities involve mining, drilling,
forestry, farming, quarrying etc.
(a) Construction Industry
(b) Manufacturing industry
(c) Extractive industry
(d) Service industry

1.2. .................. can be viewed as an economic system in which goods and services are
exchanged for one another or money, on the basis of the perceived worth.
(a) Business
(b) Contract
(c) Marketing
(d) Commerce

12
1.3. One of these is not a method of classifying business
(a) types of customers
(b) types of goods produced
(c) industry characteristics
(d) company’s name

1.4. This industry does not produce physical goods but yet very productive through work
done for others which are demanded and paid for by customers.
(a) Extractive industry
(b) Service industry
(c) Commercial Industry
(d) Construction industry
1.5. All the following are objectives of business except
(a) Enhance employees’ satisfaction
(b) Focus on customer satisfaction
(c) Utility creation
(d) make profit any how

Links to OERs
https://openstax.org/details/books/introductionbusiness
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com
http://www.allbusiness.com/glossaries/business/4959436-1.html

References and Suggestions for further readings


Ferrell, O. C., Hirt. G. And Ferrell, L. (2008). Business A Changing World. 6th Ed. New
York, McGraw Hill Pub.
Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An Introduction. Lagos.
Concept Publications Ltd.
Urbach Hacker Young (UHY) 2008. Doing Business in Nigeria

13
Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

14
STUDY SESSION 2:

THE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Introduction

In study session 1 we looked at the concept of business, economic foundations on which business

was built and the classification of business. Every business operates within a given environment,

the environment affects business and business also affects the environment. Business and the

environment have a symbiotic relationship. Since business and environment are interrelated, it is

important for you as a business student to understand the inter-relatedness so as to position your

self properly for business decision making in a changing environment. In this study session, you

will be exposed to the meaning of business environment and the components of business

environment. You will also learn the composition of the two major environment (the internal and

external environment) and be able to differentiate between the two. The importance or need for

business managers to understand their environment will also be examined while not leaving out

the characteristics of business environment. Please read on.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 2

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:
2.1 Define and use correctly all of the key words printed in bold (SAQ 2.1 and 2.3)
2.2 Define Business Environment (SAQ 2.3)
2.3 State the components of business environment (SAQ 2.3)
2.4 Distinguish between internal and external environment (SAQ 2.1)
2.5 Explain the importance of understanding the environment (SAQ 2.2)
2.6 List and explain the three characteristics of business environment (SAQ 2.4)

15
Key Terms: Business Environment, Internal environment, External environment,
Organizational resources, Organizational behaviours, macro-Environment

2.1 The Concept of the Environment


We all live in an environment and work in different environments. Some environments are friendly,

others are not. Our environment affects the way we live and work. It is known that the environment

also affects our health or well-being. We need to comprehend our environment in order to live and

operate effectively. For instance, businesses in the south west region of Nigeria tend to be enjoying

more friendly business environment than those in the Niger Delta or the South South region of

Nigeria which has been experiencing unrest, disturbances, kidnap, hostage holding and the likes.

In the recent time, businesses in especially the North Central region of Nigeria may be relocating

or folding up due to killings, bombings, and general unrest existent there now. The environment is

no longer conducive for doing business.

Environment literally means the surroundings, external objects, influences, or circumstances

under which someone or something exists (Kazmi, 1999). The environment within which

something exists exhibits certain characteristics which have been identified by Kazmi (1999) to

be: complexity, dynamism, multifaceted and far-reaching impact. In the context of business, the

environment refers to the sum of internal and external forces operating in an organization.

Define Environment according to Kazmi (1999)

Environment literally means the surroundings, external objects, influences, or

circumstances under which someone or something exists (Kazmi, 1999).

16
2.2 The Concept of Business Environment

The business environment is simply the surroundings within which a business exists. Business

environment embraces all institutions, organisations and individuals whose activities have an

impact, whether directly or indirectly, on business behaviour (Ifechukwu, 1986). The type of

business activity that exists in a particular place or community, state or country is to a great extent

determined by the law, beliefs, needs and attitudes of that community. The interrelationship

between business and the community where it operates constitutes the environment. Business

environment differs from state to state, region to region, and country to country. Some

environments may be favourable while others may be hostile.

Define Environment according to Kazmi (1999)

Environment literally means the surroundings, external objects, influences, or circumstances

under which someone or something exists (Kazmi, 1999).

The environment of business cannot be said to be the same in states, regions, and countries.

If you are asked to situate your business in Nigeria choosing from the two regions earlier

mentioned (Southwest and South South) which of the regions, would you prefer and why?

I would prefer the Southwest region for now because of the relative peace which exists

in the environment. The South-South region is still witnessing unrest and disturbances.

2.3 Components of the Business Environment – An overview

Business environment has been classified by different scholars using various bases or criteria.

However, it should be noted that the business environment is made up of the internal and the

external environment. The external environment is further divided into two - Macro and Micro

Environment. The macro environment is regarded as the general environment while the

microenvironment is regarded as the specific or task environment. The internal environment could

17
be termed the controllable environment while the external environment is seen as uncontrollable.

These environments are discussed briefly below.

2.3.1 Internal Environmental Factors

The internal environmental factors refer to those factors over which the management of the

business has control, at least in the short run; this is why it is also called the controllable

environment of the business. The internal environment of business is made up of all those

physical and social factors within the boundaries of the business, which impart strengths or cause

weaknesses of a strategic nature and are taken directly into consideration in the decision-making

behaviour of the business. Strengths are inherent capacities, which a business can use to gain

strategic advantage over its competitors; they are the internal strong points of the business such as:

its core skills, competencies, and expertise. While weaknesses are inherent limitations or

constraints, which create strategic disadvantages, they are the internal factors that are lacking in

the business. A successful manager will find ways of overcoming weaknesses and convert them

into strengths (Ifechukwu, 1986; Kazmi, 1999; Business-Plan, 2010).

The internal environment of the business is made up of micro-environmental factors such as

organizational goals and objectives, specific technologies utilized by component units of the

organization, the size, types and quality of personnel, its administrative units, and the nature of the

organization’s product/service (Ifechukwu, 1986). The nature of a business internal environment

is also determined by the organizational resources, organizational behaviour, strengths,

weaknesses, synergistic relationships and distinctive competence (Kazmi, 1999).

In Kazmi’s (1999) view:

Organizational resources are the physical and human resources used as inputs in the organization

to create outputs.

Organizational behaviour is the manifestation of the various forces and influences operating in

the internal environment of an organization.

18
Strengths are inherent capabilities that give strategic advantage.

Weaknesses are inherent limitations or constraints, which create strategic disadvantages.

Synergy is an idea that a combined effort is greater than mere summation of the efforts of the

individual parts. The result of working together of two or more people, organisations, or things is

usually greater than the sum of their individual effects or capabilities.

Distinctive competence: The specific ability possessed by a particular organization that

distinguishes it from others.

Organizational capability: This is the inherent capacity or ability of an organization to use its

strengths, and overcome its weaknesses in order to exploit opportunities and face threats in its

external environment. The component of the environment is depicted in figure 2.1 below.

Fig. 2.1: Components of the Business Environment

Source: http://courseware.finntrack.eu/tutors/strat_cases_teaching.html

2.3.2 External Environmental Factors

An organization operates within the larger framework of the external environment that shapes

opportunities and poses threats to the organization. The external environment is a set of complex,

rapidly changing and significant interacting institutions and forces that affect the organization's

19
ability to serve its customers. External forces are not controlled by an organization but they may

be influenced or affected by the organization. It is necessary for organizations to understand the

environmental conditions because they interact with strategy decisions. The external environment

has a major impact on the determination of marketing decisions. Successful organizations scan

their external environment so that they can respond profitably to unmet needs and trends in the

targeted markets.

Internally, an organization can be viewed as a resource conversion machine that takes inputs

(labour, money, materials and equipment) from the external environment (i.e., the world outside

the boundaries of the organization), converts them into useful products, goods, and services, and

makes them available to customers as outputs. The organization must continuously monitor and

adapt to the environment if it is to survive and prosper. Disturbances in the environment may spell

profound threats or new opportunities. The successful organization will identify, appraise, and

respond to the various opportunities and threats in its environment. The external environment is

divided into two – macro and micro environment. The macro environment is referred to as the

general or remote environment while the micro environment is seen as the specific or task or

operating environment. Read further to see the description of these environments.

2.3.2.1 Macro environment (General or Remote Environment)

The external macro environment consists of all the outside institutions and forces that have an

actual or potential interest or impact on the organization's ability to achieve its objectives. This

includes the economic, technological, political, legal, social, cultural, demographic and ecosystem.

Though non-controllable, these forces require a response in order to keep positive actions with the

targeted markets. An organization with an environmental management perspective takes

aggressive actions to affect the forces in its marketing environment rather than simply watching

and reacting to it.

Economic Environment The economic environment consists of factors that affect consumer

20
purchasing power and spending patterns. Economic factors include business cycles, inflation,

unemployment, interest rates, and income. Changes in major economic variables have a significant

impact on the marketplace. For example, income affects consumer spending which affects sales

for organizations. According to Engel's Laws, as income rises, the percentage of income spent on

food decreases, while the percentage spent on housing remains constant.

Technological Environment The technological environment refers to new techniques or methods

which are used to create new product and market opportunities. Technological developments are

the most manageable uncontrollable forces faced by marketers. Organizations need to be aware of

new technologies in order to turn these advances into opportunities and a competitive edge.

Technology has a tremendous effect on life-styles, consumption patterns, and the economy.

Advances in technology can start new industries, radically alter or destroy existing industries, and

stimulate entirely separate markets. The rapid rate at which technology changes have forced

organizations to quickly adapt in terms of how they develop, price, distribute, and promote their

products.

Political and Legal Environment Organizations must operate within a framework of

governmental regulation and legislation. Government relationships with organizations encompass

subsidies, tariffs, import quotas, and deregulation of industries. You can readily recall the subsidy

removal strategy of the present government (January 2012) and the reasons advanced for it. The

political environment includes governmental and special interest groups that influence and limit

various organizations and individuals in a given society. Organizations hire lobbyists to influence

legislation and run advocacy adverts that state their point of view on public issues. Special interest

groups have grown in number and power over the last three decades, putting more constraints on

businesses. The public expects organizations to be ethical and responsible. In the U.S. for instance,

an example of response by marketers to special interests is the green marketing, the use of

21
recyclable or biodegradable packing materials as part of marketing strategy. The major purposes

of business legislation include protection of companies from unfair competition, protection of

consumers from unfair business practices and protection of the interests of society from unbridled

business behaviour.

Demographic Environment Demographics tell marketers who current and potential customers

are, where they are, and how many are likely to buy what the marketer is selling. Demography is

the study of human populations in terms of size, density, location, age, sex, race, occupation, and

other statistics. Changes in the demographic environment can result in significant opportunities

and threats presenting themselves to the organization. Major trends for marketers in the

demographic environment include worldwide explosive population growth, a changing age, ethnic

and educational mix, new types of households, and geographical shifts in population.

Social/Cultural Environment Social/cultural forces are the most difficult uncontrollable variables

to predict. It is important for businesses as well as marketers to understand and appreciate the

cultural values of the environment in which they operate. The cultural environment is made up of

forces that affect society's basic values, perceptions, preferences, and behaviours. Changes in

social/cultural environment affect consumer behaviour, which affects sales of products. Trends in

the cultural environment include individuals changing their views of themselves, others, and the

world around them and movement toward self-fulfilment, immediate gratification, and secularism.

Ecosystem Environment The ecosystem refers to natural systems and its resources that are needed

as inputs by businesses or that are affected by business activities. Green marketing or

environmental concern about the physical environment has intensified in recent years. To avoid

shortages in raw materials, organizations can use renewable resources (such as forests) and

alternatives (such as solar and wind energy) for non-renewable resources (such as oil and coal).

22
Organizations can limit their energy usage by increasing efficiency. Goodwill can be built by

voluntarily engaging in pollution prevention activities and natural resource.

2.3.2.2 Micro (Specific or Task or Operating) Environment


The external microenvironment consists of forces that are part of an organization's marketing
process but are external to the organization. These micro environmental forces include the
organization's market, competitors, producer-suppliers, and its marketing intermediaries. While
these are external, the organization is capable of exerting more influence over these than forces
in the macro environment.

The Market Organizations closely monitor their customer markets in order to adjust to changing

tastes and preferences. A market consists of people or organizations with wants to satisfy, money

to spend, and the willingness to spend it. Each target market has distinct needs, which should be

monitored. It is imperative for an organization to know their customers, how to reach them and

when customers' needs change in order to adjust its marketing efforts accordingly. The market is

the focal point for all marketing decisions in an organization.

Suppliers: Suppliers are organizations and individuals that provide the resources needed to

produce goods and services. They are critical to an organization's marketing success and an

important link in its value delivery system.

Marketing Intermediaries: Like suppliers, marketing intermediaries are an important part of the

system used to deliver value to customers. Marketing intermediaries are independent organizations

that aid in the flow of products from the marketing organization to its markets. The intermediaries

between an organization and its markets constitute a channel of distribution or value chain. These

include middlemen (wholesalers and retailers who buy and resell merchandise). Physical

distribution firms help the organization to stock and move products from their points of origin to

their destinations. Warehouses store and protect the goods before they move to the next destination.

Marketing service agencies help the organization target and promote its products. The agencies

include marketing research firms, advertising agencies, and media firms. Financial intermediaries

23
help finance transactions and insure against risks and include banks, credit unions, and insurance

companies. Figure 1.2 below shows the business in a web of the external environmental factors.

Fig. 2.2: Business and External Environment

Source:http://courseware.finntrack.eu/tutors/strat_cases_teaching.html

In what class of environment would technological and demographic changes fall?

Technological and demographic changes reside within the macro (general or


remote) environment of business.

2.4 Importance of understanding the environment

The Manager’s job cannot be accomplished in a vacuum within the organization. There are a

number of factors both internal as well as external which jointly affect managerial decision-

making. It is therefore very important for the manager to understand and evaluate the impact of the

24
business environment due to the following reasons:

 The present and future viability of an enterprise is impacted by the environment.

For instance no television manufacturer would be expected to survive by making only

Black and White television sets when consumer preference has clearly shifted to colour

television sets.

 The cost of capital and the cost of borrowing - two key financial drivers of any

enterprise are impacted by the external environment. The ability of a business to fund its

expansion plan by raising money from the stock markets depends on the prevalent public

mood towards investment in stock markets.

 The availability of all key inputs like skilled labour, trained managers, raw

materials, electricity, transportation, fuel etc are a factor of the business environment.

 Increasing public awareness of the negative aspects of certain industries like hand

woven carpets (use of child labour), pesticides (damage to environment in the form of

chemical residues in groundwater), and plastic bags (choking of sewer lines) have

resulted in the slow decline of some industries.

 Finally, the environment offers the opportunities for growth and profits. For e.g.

when the insurance and aviation industry was thrown open to the private sector, the new

entrant could easily build on the expectations of the public.

Thinking back at our discussion of the environment, briefly explain the two
major components of business environment.

The two major components of business environment are the internal and the
external environments. The internal environments is regarded as the controllable
environment and consist of those factors (physical and social) within the specific
business, which either strengthens or cause weaknesses of a strategic nature to the
business while the external environments comprise the general or remote as well as
the specific or task environment peculiar to a particular business.

25
2.5 Characteristics of Business Environment

The environment of business exhibits the following characteristics:


Dynamism: The business environment is not static. It is dynamic and as such changes

continuously. This is because of the interactions of the various factors that make up the business

environment.

Complexity: The business environment is not simple; it is complex by virtue of the various

components that comprise it and the interactions and interrelationships among these factors.

Multifaceted: The business environment is many-sided. It can be viewed from many angles by the

parties involved. Hence, an occurrence that is viewed as strength to an organization may be

perceived as a weakness by another.

Far-reaching impact: The happenings in the business environment can have enormous impact on

the organization. It could have the ripple effect. This is because the business environment can be

conceived as a system, specifically an open system made up of different components that interact

and interrelate with one another. Hence, once there is a problem or development with one

aspect/sector, it could have far-reaching impact on the other aspects/sectors (Kazmi, 1999).

By virtue of the above characteristics, it is important for the manager to monitor the business

environment constantly. Thus, it is of fundamental importance for the manager to monitor both the

key macro-environmental forces (demographic/economic, technological, political/legal and

social/cultural) and micro-environmental forces (customers, competition, distribution channels,

and suppliers) that will affect their ability to earn profits in the market place (Kotler, 1995). These

macro-environmental forces and micro-environmental forces are the components of the business

environment.

In how many ways can you describe the characteristics of business environment
as proffered by Kazmi (1999)?

26
The characteristics of environment can be described in four ways. The environment
is dynamic, complex, multi-faceted and has far-reaching impact

Summary of Study Session 2


In this Study Session, you have learnt:
1. the concept of environment and business environment;

2. the components of business environment as internal and external, while also listing the
characteristics of business environment.

3. the importance of understanding business environment was also treated.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 2

Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers at

the end of this course material.

SAQ 2.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 2.4)


In three sentences distinguish between internal and external environment
SAQ 2.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 2.5)
Give four reasons why it is important for a manager to understand the environment of business
SAQ 2.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 2.2 and 2.3)
Define business environment and state the components of the environment
SAQ 2.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 2.6)
What are the characteristics of business environment? List and explain the four characteristics

Multiple Choice Questions


Choosing the appropriate options fill in the gaps in the following questions.
1. .............. environment is regarded as the general environment while ............... environment
is regarded as the specific or task environment.
(a) Micro, Macro
(b) Macro, Micro
(c) Micromacro, Macromicro

27
(d) Macromicro, Micromacro
2. .................. environment is termed as controllable environment while the ...............
environment is seen as uncontrollable.
(a) External, Internal
(b) Internal, External
(c) None of the above
(d) All of the above

3. ......................literally
means the surroundings, external objects, influences or
circumstances under which someone or something exists.
(a) Society
(b) Environment
(c) Community
(d) Neighbourhood

4. ....................... embraces all institutions, organisations and individuals whose activities


have an impact, whether directly or indirectly, on business behaviour.
(a) Business environment
(b) Economic environment
(c) Political Environment
(d) Sociocultural environment

5. Business environment is made up of ...........................


(a) Internal environment only
(b) External environment only
(c) Internal and External environment
(d) macro environment

Links to OERs
https://openstax.org/details/books/introduction-business
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References and Suggestions for futher readings


Business-Plan (2010). “Swotanalyse|SWOTAnalysis”.
http://www.businessplan.co.za/swotanalyze.html
Ifechukwu, J.A.O. (1986), Business Management: Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition,
Goldland Business Co. Ltd., Yaba, Lagos
Kazmi, A. (1999), Business Policy. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
Kotler, P. (1995). Marketing-Management, Analysis, Planning, Implementation, and
Control. New Delhi; 8th Ed., Prentice Hall of India private Limited.

28
Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

29
STUDY SESSION 3:

OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS AND BUSINESS FAILURE

Introduction

All organisations are affected by the general components of the external environment we talked

about in challenges of business management. These environments create opportunities or threats

to organisations depending on their ability to utilize their innate strengths rather than weaknesses.

This explains the fact that businesses or organisations function in a closer, more immediate

competitive environment. For us to identify business opportunity or threat requires us to conduct

situational or environmental analysis or be alert to happenings around our environment. A business

should be concerned about opportunities and threats simply to ensure organisational success. This

can be done by formulating and developing an effective strategy. One vital way of doing this is by

consistently conducting a SWOT analysis. SWOT entails asking questions and providing answers

to such questions.

Albert Einstein once said “The important thing is not to stop questioning”. That is, we must continue to
ask questions and continually seek knowledge.

It is very important to examine why certain businesses fail so that we can learn from their mistakes

and take guidance from the successful ones. Many businesses fail because of some common causes

which many entrepreneurs ignore at the onset and in the course of the business. Others fail because

of environmental influences beyond the manager or entrepreneur. These causes of business failure

can be classified into two broad categories – Micro (internal) and Macro (external). Business can

fail because of the micro or macro factors or even a combination of both factors.

30
Learning Outcomes for Study session 3
After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:
3.1 Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 3.1, 3.2 and 3.6 )
3.2 Discuss the meaning of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) (SAQ
3.1)
3.3 List the indicators of unmet needs (SAQ 3.2)
3.4 Explain the constraints to exploiting business opportunities (SAQ 3.5)
3.5 List institutional sources of business ideas (SAQ 3.4)
3.6 State Macro and Micro causes of business failure (SAQ 3.3)
State strategies for business survival (SAQ 3.6)

Key Terms: Organization’s strength, Weakness, Opportunities, Threat

3.1 What is SWOT?


SWOT is simply an acronym representing Strength, Weakness, Opportunity, and Threat. An

organisation’s strength is its ability, resources, and the weakness of the competitor or the

opposition. The internal strengths include a company’s core competencies, corporate capabilities

and resources that provide the basis for your strategy, e.g. workforce, decision making process,

flexible board, good working environment, and financial capability. The weakness of an

organisation is its failures, defeats (what other people do better than you), losses and inability to

match up with the dynamic situation of the growth of change. This includes the critical parts of

your business you must strengthen or hide from your competitors. Opportunities are possibilities

of what can be done and where effectiveness is possible, the benefits that are likely to accrue from

pursuing your vision. Threats are changes in business environment usually in the PEST forces

which are pitfalls, dangers, variation and exceptions that are present in an environment.

31
When SWOT is carried out, it prompts actions and responses. It helps balance idealism and

pragmatism so you can obtain a balanced perspective of your internal strengths and weaknesses

and external opportunities and threats in order to develop an effective strategy. Successful

entrepreneurs or businesses build on their strengths, correct their weaknesses and protect against

internal vulnerabilities and external threats. They also keep an eye on their overall business

environment and spot and exploit new opportunities faster than competitors.

Business Strength: Strength is an inherent capacity which an organisation can use to gain a

strategic advantage over its competitors. An example of strength is superior research and

development skills which can be used for new product development so that the company gains a

competitive advantage.

Business Weakness: A weakness is an inherent limitation or constraint which creates a strategic

disadvantage. An example of a weakness for a manufacturing company may be over dependence

on a single product line which is potentially risky for a company in times of crisis.

Business Opportunity: An opportunity is a favourable condition in an organisations environment

which enables it to consolidate and strengthen its position. A business opportunity represents a

trend or event that can positively affect the operations and achievement of organisational objectives

under a strategic response. Opportunities are external conditions that are helpful in achieving the

organisational purposes. An example of an opportunity is growing demand for the products or

services that a company provides.

Business Threat: A threat is an unprocurable condition in the organisations environment which

creates a risk for or causes damage to the organisation. A business threat is a trend or event that

would have adverse effects on the operations and achievement of organisational objectives under

a strategic response. Threats can also be external conditions that are harmful to achieving

organisational purposes. An example of a threat is the emergence of strong competitors who are

likely to offer stiff competition to the existing companies in the industry. They come from political,

economic, social and technological forces. For instance, if technology in your line of business is

32
changing and yours is obsolete, then it is a threat. If government is asking for increase in taxation

and source of income has not increased, it is a threat.

An organization that can take good decision but at slower or bureaucratic pace can be
said to have that as its business strength. Discuss?

Such decision making process could be seen as a weakness because faster decision
making competitors would have taken advantage of the situation even before they
know what is happening. It can only be strength if there are no competitors or the
competitors are even slower.

Fig. 3.1: SWOT Analysis

Source: http://blogs.triplealearning.com/2010/10/diploma/dp_busman/the-trouble-with-swot/

An understanding of the external environment in terms of the opportunities and threats and the

internal environment in terms of the strengths and weaknesses is crucial for the growth and

profitability of any organisation.

3.2 Identification of Opportunities


Opportunities can exist for both potential as well as existing businesses. For existing businesses

33
whether they want to broaden their investment or diversify, there is need to always search the

environment for information and source for business ideas to identify where opportunities exist.

For potential entrants, their search is drawn according to their interest. Identifying business

opportunities for big corporations could be the functions of the research and development unit or

the strategic business development unit. For others it could be through personal efforts. What is

important however is that the search is to identify unmet needs?

Needs, according to Abraham Maslow, is classified in hierarchies from basic needs which are

physiological (food, water, warmth, shelter) to security, to esteem needs (psychological or learned

needs) such as status, love or belongingness, social recognition, power, prestige, achievement

which are acquired through socialization. From each of these levels of needs, a gap may exist

which portends an opportunity to be tapped, and it only requires identifying that gap and being

able to fill it.

Case Study 3.1 Recapitalization of Banks

Supposing Central Bank of Nigeria imposes another recapitalization exercise on the Banks say to the tune
of N500 billion and insists that banks unable to attain that will be closed. However, option of mergers and
acquisition is available, CBN will also be ready to give a bail out to willing banks following a particular
contract term. Now answer the question below.

Where is the opportunity or threat in this case?

The opportunity lies in the fact that any bank whose capital layout is up to the
stipulated amount would not be closed and can also acquire other banks and get
bigger. However, it will pose a very big threat to banks whose minimum paid up
capital is less than that, and there is no possibility of raising the amount within the
stipulated time.

3.2.1 Indicators of Unmet needs

When we identify trends in our environment through the situational analysis described above or

through observations and discovers there is a ‘gap’ or unsatisfied/unmet needs, it becomes an

34
opportunity to tap in. The indicators of such opportunities as enunciated by Isimoya (2005) are:-

1. Poor delivery of products/services: - where there are complaints and visible problems

faced by customers, one can see it as an opportunity and come up with better method of

delivering such products/services. E.g., in the past, letters, parcels, etc, were handled by

NIPOST, but the courier companies saw the visible complaints and dissatisfaction in

customers and today have taken over the market from NIPOST.

2. Dissonance (lack of Agreement in beliefs) with current means of satisfying existing

needs: If people’s expectations are not met in certain products or services, dissatisfaction

sets in. For instance, when it became obvious that our public or government schools were

no longer meeting the expectations of the populace, the private schools came in. Nigerian

Airways with its abysmal service paved way for private airline operators.

3. Emergent Needs: These are envisaged needs or needs in the early stages of development.

Every need at a point in time was emergent. Tapping into this opportunity has so much to

do with foresight. Your ability to foresee a need to be met in the future, perhaps needs that

may arise through the use or availability of a current product. Nigeria for instance has need

for storage/preservation of our fruits and vegetables especially because they are mostly

seasonal produce. This is a gap identified. If any individual or organisation can come up

with a best approach to preserving these foods so as to have them all round the season, the

business will thrive. The individual will have government and farmers’ support and

patronage. For instance, people foresaw the danger in carrying cash and came up with the

idea of credit cards, ATM cards, and the on-line real-time banking. Another emergent need

is the scraps of old and used cars littered all over. What can be done with them? Is there a

way they can be recycled so as to still put them into good use? Think about this.

35
4. Technological Changes: The issue of technology is dynamic, we all agree. An innovative

entrepreneur will always be interested in thinking of ways to improve the existing

technology in its line of operation if he/she has the means of doing so, especially if he/she

feels that a particular technology is becoming obsolete or no longer serving its purpose.

This way he may find it as a business opportunity to launch the better technology which

customers or users may prefer to the existing one. For instance, it took an innovative and

ingenious business men to realize that grinding of tomatoes, pepper, pounding of yam, etc.

which hitherto was done manually through the use of mortar could get a better result using

machines (Blender, Poundo machine). A gap existed there because some career women

have little or no time to pound and a machine was just apt.

5. Envisaged Large Market: When the users of a product are many such that those serving

the market may not be doing that effectively, other businessmen could go into that market,

since it is large enough to accommodate all. For instance, most of the Igbo traders that

bring in radio face the northern market knowing that this group of people especially the

lower status like listening to the radio a lot.

6. Monopoly: Where there is no statutory barrier as to the entry into a particular business, any

interested entrepreneur could go into the line of business, more so if he feels he could make

greater impact, either in service delivery or in the production of the goods or services. The

entrepreneur could also develop a competitive product to create an alternative or allow

customers have choices to that kind of business. NITEL for instance was statutorily created

to provide communication for the nation. No entrepreneur was allowed into the business of

communication until few years past when it became obvious that the issue of

communication needed to be privatized and commercialized. Same is almost applying to

PHCN now as people are calling for private enterprise in the business of power generation.

36
So where a business is seen as monopolizing the production of a particular product or

services, others may step in to enjoy a share of the market.

7. Segmentation: Where an entrepreneur identifies that a particular segment or group of a

market is not served due to their peculiar difference, such entrepreneur has seen a gap or

an unmet need and could close in to exploit the opportunity by tailoring his product or

service toward the market if the capacity to do so is provided. For instance, University of

Lagos started its Distance Learning (DLI) programme having discovered that a particular

segment of the society was almost denied education due to the fact that they were unable

to secure admission through the regular means or didn’t have the opportunity to even seek

education; they felt there should be a second chance for them to live out their dreams.

Several people abound who wants university education but are too busy to come

to

class even on a weekend. NUC noticed this and is introducing Open and Distance

Learning System. What do you think NUC is doing?

NUC discovered there was a gap and an unmet need and decided to close in on

that by encouraging universities to take advantage of the opportunity presented by

this yearning population.

3.3 Institutionalized sources of business


Even though large organisations use their research and development unit to source business

ideas, there are institutionalized sources of business idea according to Isimoya (2005). These

include:

37
i. Universities and Research Institutes

These are centres where students and consultants have done a lot of research on new

businesses and the reports have largely been left to waste. Examples are Federal Institute

of Industrial Research Oshodi (FIIRO), Project Development Agency (PRODA) Enugu,

and all other universities and research bodies. These places could be visited by an

entrepreneur to check the possibility of finding a researched work which will serve as an

opportunity to be cashed upon.

ii. Consulting Firms/Market Researchers


iii. Ministry of Science and Technology
iv. Industrial and business publications
There is very vital information published by business journals /magazines etc. This can help a

searching mind to identify a business opportunity. For instance, Business Day, Financial

times, etc.

v. Banks

Some banks have their in-house journals which discerning minds can identify opportunities in.

The journal mirrors the society and trend of events in it. For instance, UBA in the 80s

and early 90s had what it called the economic digest which reported mostly economic

activities and businesses financed by the bank.

vi. Family Members and Employee

One’s family members and even employees can also be a good source of information for business

opportunities.

3.4 Constraints to the exploitation of business opportunity


1) Economic Factors. These include cost consideration (capital needed, level of competition

in the market, resource availability such as adequate skilled manpower and suitable material

resources, location, and the size of the market.

38
2) Technical factors. Lack of technical know-how to provide such goods and services that

will satisfy customers. From some perspective people will jump at products that can prevent

baldness, loss of sight, death or sickness, but there is no technology to that effect yet.

3) Knowledge factors. This could be a constraint because the right knowledge to the
opportunity or gap may be missing.

List three constraints to exploitation of business opportunity.

Three constraints to business opportunity exploitation are economic factors, technical


factors, and knowledge factors.

3.5 Business Failure


Several factors could be responsible for the failure of a business venture. The possible reasons may

be either due to the entrepreneur’s fault, or because of forces beyond the entrepreneur’s control.

These causes have been classified as micro (internal) and macro (external) causes of business

failure. Read on.

3.5.1 Micro Causes of Business Failure (Internal)

This section looks at the failure of business from the entrepreneur’s point of view or because of the

fault of the owners.

1. Laying more emphasis on product rather than market and marketing

The requirement to identify a market for your idea or the product is more important than the product

itself. You may have a great idea or a product, but if there are no buyers for the product then it

cannot be a success. Smart businessmen and women first identify the market requirement and then

develop products accordingly. For your business idea to succeed you need to first find out if there

is a market for your idea by conducting a market test run. Find out if people want your product,

and how much they are ready to pay for it.

39
2. Laying more emphasis on the company image.

To project a high-profile image for the company by hiring expensive office space and a fancy logo

and website will not do much to facilitate the success of your business. In fact, high overheads,

because of expensive space and website maintenance costs, can drive you out of business very fast.

The golden rule for the success of any business is to keep overheads low especially at the start up

time. At the start up time, keep the overheads low by reducing expenses. Operate from modest

office space. Prospects cannot see where you are operating from and they do not care, anyway. Try

to invest more on your marketing activities, which are likely to increase your revenue and chances

of success.

3. Getting into Undesirable or Bad Business Partnership.

You should get into business partnership only if you find that your ideas match with the probable

partner, because business partnerships are even more difficult to maintain than marriages. Many

partnerships fail because of lack of communication, proper documentation, and deeds. A failed

partnership can lead to bankruptcy and soured relations with the business partner. Avoid

partnerships completely if you possibly can. But if you must get into a business partnership, make

sure the duties and responsibilities of the partners are detailed right from the start and the

partnership deed along with commercial terms is clearly defined

4. Attempting to have a very complex business model

The simpler the business model, the better it is. In a simple and uncomplicated business model,

everybody including your vendors, suppliers, employees, and customers are well aware of their

responsibilities and goals. In a complex model they have to adapt themselves to new roles that they

may not be comfortable with. While devising the business model, follow the rule of "keep it

simple". As the business grows and gets established, you can shift to a more radical or complicated

business model, if required.

5. Attempting to pioneer a new product or industry

Many businesses get into the vicious cycle of trying to pioneer a new product or industry- many a

40
times the whole exercise can drain you and your business completely, without much success. Very

few and limited entrepreneurs succeed in radically new businesses. Even customers at times are

scared off because of a totally new concept or product; hence the chances of success are not

assured, despite all the efforts that you may apply. Try to achieve extraordinary business success

by simply improving the business practices of the existing business, rather than trying your hand

at pioneering a new product. Once the business is established, you can try to get into the pioneering

new product cycle.

6. Poor business planning/financial decisions. Not carrying out feasibility studies.

7. Inadequate capital before commencement of business

8. Bad management

9. Cash flow problems: you spend more than you receive

10. Fall in demand for the product

11. Lack of control of costs/rise in cost

12. Over expansion

13. Ineffective sales force

14. Fraud\fraudulent practices/lack of viable work ethics

15. Failure to meet competition

16. Location of business

17. Inadequate number of workers/staffs

18. Slow season e.g., children’s bags, umbrellas produced

19. Dealing on cheap/substandard products or services

20. Lack of awareness of the business by its target market/environment

21. Not engaging in business promotion/advertisement

22. Corporate maturity: as a firm goes through its normal life cycle and eventually declines.

23. Getting involved in a business lawsuit and bankruptcy. Business lawsuits that are not in your

favour can take away all your assets, including your personal assets like home, property, savings,

41
etc, and make you and your business bankrupt. Always operate a business under the protection of

a corporation, courtesy of which you get a corporate shield. In this way personal liability to the

business is limited to whatever you choose to put in your business. It is always advisable to hire

the services of a lawyer and an accountant to discuss your personal involvement in the business,

with respect to assets and even taxation. If carefully planned, you can eliminate almost 100% of

all potential legal threats which could go against your personal assets.

1) Knowledge factors. This could be a constraint because the right knowledge to the
opportunity or gap may be missing.

Outline any five micro causes of business failure

Five micro causes of business failure may include laying emphasis on product instead
of market and marketing; attempting to pioneer a new product; poor business planning,
inadequate capital, and location of business.

3.5.2 Macro causes of Business Failure (External)

1. Political instability

2. Lack of infrastructural development


3. Corrupt practices in society especially among technocrats who thwart government
economic policies
4. Low technological know-how. Most businesses can’t fit in into the latest technologies.
5. Limited sources of capital in issue of access to funds and demand for collateral
6. Labour management face off
7. Poor and inadequate funding of the educational system where future leaders in government
are trained
8. Lack of research

List any five macro causes of business failure

Five macro causes of business failure are Political instability, Lack of


infrastructural development, Corrupt practices in the society especially among
technocrats who thwart government economic policies, Low technological

42
capacity, Limited sources of capital in issue of access to funds and demand for
collateral.

3.6 Survival for Small Scale Businesses


Small businesses can survive if they:

1. Have adequate capital requirement

2. Have innate qualities

3. Engage in customs-made goods since large firms engage in mass production

4. Subsidiary firms

5. Are innovative and ingenuous

6. Have lower capital investment and operating cost

7. Are exempted from corporation tax

8. Source for raw materials locally

Summary of Study Session 3

In this Study Session, you have learnt:


1) the concepts of business opportunity, ideas generation and business threat.

2) the definitions of business opportunity and threat, as well as idea generation in business.
Some of the indicators of business opportunities were highlighted as well as institutional
sources of business ideas.

3) the constraints to business opportunity were also investigated.

4) the micro and macro causes of business failure, factors like poor business
planning/financial decisions, not carrying out feasibility studies, inadequate capital before
commencement of business, bad management, cash flow problems (as you spend more than
you receive) were discovered as micro causes while limited access to credit facilities, lack
of infrastructure, political instability may be the macro causes. Survival strategies were also
suggested.

43
Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 3

Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 3.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.1 and 3.2)


Define Strengths, weakness, opportunities, and threats
SAQ 3.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.3)
What are the indicators of unmet needs? State five indicators
SAQ 3.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.6)
List and explain five micro causes of business failure
SAQ 3.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.5)
Identify three institutionalized sources of business ideas
SAQ 3.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.4)
State three constraints to exploiting business opportunity
SAQ 3.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.7)
Mention four strategies for business survival

Multiple Choice Questions


From the alternatives choose the best option

1. Macro causes of business failure include all except


(a) political instability
(b) lack of infrastucture
(c) Bad management
(d) Corrupt practices

2. “Keep it simple” is a rule followed while


(a) devising the business model
(b) attempting to pioneer a new product
(c) laying more emphasis on the company’s image
(d) getting into undesirable business partnership

3. Laying more emphasis on the company’s image may lead to high overheads in business.
(a)True
(b) False
(c) No idea

4. Attempting to pioneer a new product or industry may at times drain the business completely
without much success.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

44
5. One survival strategy is ..................... before venturing into a business.
(a) not having adequate capital
(b) having adequate capital
(c) having adequate product
(d) not having adequate product

6. ..................... for the product may be one of the macro causes of business failure.
(a) Increase in supply
(b) Increase in demand
(c) Fall in demand
(d) inelastic demand

7. ----------- is an unprocurable condition in the organisations environment which creates a risk


for or causes damage to the organisation.
(a) opportunity
(b) threats
(c) difficulty
(d) all of the above

8. ---------- represents a trend or event that can positively affect the operations and achievement
of organisational objectives under a strategic response
(a) threat
(b) opportunity
(c) friendly environment
(d) none of the above

9. The following except one are constraints to exploiting business opportunity


(a) Economic factors
(b) Knowledge factors
(c) Technical Factors
(d) None of the above

10. Indicators of Unmet needs include all except


a) poor delivery of products/services
b) Dissonance
c) Technology changes
d) perfect competition

11.SWOT acronym stands for


a) Strategy Weaknesses Opportunities and Threat
b) stratified Weaknesses Opportunity and Threats
c) Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and Threats
d) Strength Weakness Opportunity and Strength

Links to OERs
http://www.ukEntrepreneur.com/
https://openstax.org/details/books/introduction-business

45
References/Suggestions for further reading
Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An introduction. Lagos.
Concept Pub. Ltd.
Flippo, E. B., Munsinger, G. M. (1982). Management. 5th Edition. Boston. Allyn and
Bacon.http://www.ebay.com/itm/MANAGEMENT-fifth-edition-Flippo-and-Munsinger
/330106375390
Olusemore, G. A. (2006). Essentials of Small Business Management. Lagos; CIBN
Press Ltd.
Pearce, J.A. and Robbinson, R.B. (Jr) (2007). Strategic Management: Formulation,
Implementation and Control. 10th Edition, New York; Mc Graw Hill.

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

46
STUDY SESSION 4:

SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND BUSINESS ETHICS

Introduction

The business system is a subsystem of organised society. Business is a creation of society. It helps

in the responsibility of achieving societal objectives/expectations. The responsibility of business

traditionally is to produce and distribute goods and services in return for a profit. This definition

is no longer tenable as the increasing size and complexity of societies’ needs make it narrow. The

notion of social responsibility and ethics of business has emerged out of dynamism (frequent

changes) of relationship between business and society, business and its environment, and business

and its participants. Corporate enterprises have grown in size, the level of education has

significantly increased and people now ask a lot more questions about their rights, their privileges

and their responsibilities. Related to this is the fact that the awareness of the social impact of

business activities on the society as a whole is enormous, both overtly and covertly, directly and

indirectly.

Every organisation is part of an interactive system which has several stakeholders. The most

prominent of them are the managers, owners, employees, consumers and society at large. The

management of an organisation cannot afford to ignore or short-change any of the groups if it wants

to succeed. It has to be socially responsible.

Society expects reasonable ethical conduct on the part of business executives as they make

decisions which affect the lives of other people. Ethics emanates from a Greek word “ethika” and

from “ethos”, meaning character, or custom. Ethics is a branch of philosophy that deals with the

morality of human actions. It is a subject that deals with the ‘goodness’ or ‘wrongness’ of human

47
conduct. It is a normative subject hence it is defined differently by societies and groups. Therefore,

what is considered a virtue in one society could be a vice in another society, a case of “one man’s

meat being another man’s poison”. It is about contemporary norms or standards of conduct that

govern the relationships among human beings and their institutions. It is argued that improvements

in ethical conduct have led and will continue to lead to increases in the level of social responsibility

among business firms.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 4


After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:
4.1 Define and use correctly all the keywords printed in bold (SAQ 4.1, 4.4)
4.2 Define social responsibility (SAQ 4.1)
4.3 Identify the arguments for and against social responsibility (SAQ 4.2)
4.4 List the various stakeholders or interest groups in social responsibility (SAQ 4.7)
4.5 Mention the benefits of social responsibility to the organization (SAQ 4.3)
4.6 Define ethics and state the causes of ethical compromise and influences (SAQ 4.4)
4.7 Describe ethical issues in business and factors encouraging compliance to ethics (SAQ 4.5)
4.8 Explain measures to ensure ethical practices are followed (SAQ 4.6)

Key Terms: Social responsibility, Organization, ethical compromise, ethics, Safety


Policy, Fair dealing, Financial Statement Integrity, Conflict of Interest, Honesty,
and Fairness.

4.1 Definition of Social Responsibility

Ferrell, Hirt, and Ferrell (2008) defines social responsibility as a business’s obligation to maximize

its positive impact and minimize its negative impact on society. Pearce and Robinson (2007)

describe corporate social responsibility as the idea that business has a duty to serve society in

general as well as the financial interests of stockholders. Schermerhorn (2002) defines social

responsibility as an obligation of the organization to act in ways that serve both its own interests

48
and the interests of its many external stakeholders. Oldroyd in Isimoya (2005) sees it as the

obligation to protect and improve the welfare of society as well as its own interest. Dibb et al in

Isimoya (2005) describes social responsibility as having to do with the impact of the organisation’s

decision on the society. Essentially, social responsibility is an obligation of organisations and

companies to participate in the development and impact positively on the environment in which

they do or operate their business. It is an attempt to pay the society back for the profit they make,

hence the name Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).

These definitions imply that social responsibility fundamentally refer to actions taken by a

business (corporate body) which in some ways or to some extent assist the society to achieve one

or more of its objectives and help people to live better lives. Such actions are considered socially

responsible actions. Corporate Social Responsibility is not backed by compulsion of the law,

therefore companies are at liberty to undertake it or leave it.

Do you think a situation where government through law forces firms to put aside a
setting percentage of their income aside from the tax they pay is an act of
encouraging social responsibility?

No. It is not an act of social responsibility because social responsibility is not


backed by compulsion or law. It is voluntary.

4.1.1 Basic Assumption about Socially Responsible Business Organization

Awareness: Managers of such organizations are aware of the firm’s obligation to solve some of

the problems facing society.

Willingness: There is willingness on the part of the firm to help solve some of these social

problems, even though not all the problems of society can be solved by business organisations.

Commitment of Resources: Such organisations attempt to make decisions and actually commit

resources of various kinds in some of the following problem areas:

i. Pollution problems: air, water, solid waste, land and noise

49
ii. Poverty and discrimination problems: minority groups and women, black capitalism,

urban problems

iii. Consumerism: Product safety, misleading advertising, consumer complaints etc.

iv. Other social problems

Most socially responsible organizations are assumed to have basic characteristics.


Mention them.

Technological and demographic changes reside within the macro (general or remote)
environment of business.

4.1.2 Is There Really Need for Social Responsibility?

This leads to a very vital question. Should business be socially responsible? We have two schools

of thought. One says, ‘yes’ the other says ‘no’. There are those for and against social responsibility

of businesses. So, there are two sides to the argument.

4.1.3 Arguments in Favour Of Social Responsibility

This argument is championed by Robert F. Hansberger, T.G.P Rogers and others.

1. Business is unavoidably involved in social issues. That business corporation are an entity

of society, allowed by society to exist and if society does not exist, organisations will also

not exist. Thus, when there is a change in societal expectations about business, so should

their actions change. Without society to buy organisations’ products or services, the aims

of production and consequently profitability will be defeated.

2. Corporate businesses have the obligation and resources to help solve some of the

problems facing society. The society as we know includes its customers, owners,

employees, creditors, government, community, and the society at large which business has

a relationship with. The firm must attempt to make decisions and commit resources of

50
various kinds in some of the society’s problematic areas for the long run attainment of

business goals. According to Peter F. Drucker, “a healthy business cannot exist in a sick

society”.

3. Organisations tap their natural, material, and human resources used for production

from the environment (society), it therefore behoves them to be socially responsible in

return.

4. A better society means a better environment for doing business.

5. A favorable image of the organisation in the eyes of the public is of great importance to

the enterprise as socially responsible businesses will ward off future government

interventions and regulations. According to George Champion of Chase National Bank,

USA, business must learn to look upon its social responsibilities as inseparable from its

economic function. If it fails to do so, it leaves a void that will be quickly filled by others

– usually by the government.

6. Being socially responsible is a moral and right thing to do since most business activities

create some form of problem for the society e.g., pollution of water, land, etc. And taking

up social actions to ameliorate public outcry is welcomed.

4.1.4 Arguments Against

This is essentially advocated by Milton Friedman and others.

1. Business is an economic institution, and the only determinant of organisational

performance is economic values – profit maximisation. To fill a social role in addition to

making profits will eventually use up the capital of business firms thereby endangering the

profit-making motive.

2. The Social responsibility of business is to use its resources and engage in activities

designed to increase its profits. So long as it stays within the game, “competition without

51
deception or fraud”. For these scholars, profit maximization ensures the efficient use of

society’s resources and entail been responsible.

3. The classic view holds that business acts in a socially responsible manner if it utilizes

as efficiently as possible the resources at its disposal in meeting the goods and services

that the society wants at prices consumers were willing to pay. That is, the idea of social

responsibility is incongruent or incompatible with the concept of a free-market economy

and hence a free society.

4. As an economic institution, business lacks the ability to pursue social goals because

business is not equipped to handle social matters. Moreover, managers are economically

production-oriented and as such do not have the necessary expertise (social skills) to make

social decisions.

5. It is a subtle socialist idea. That is an indirect way of using political mechanism as

opposed to market mechanisms, as the most appropriate means of allocating scare

resources.

6. In a free enterprise system, a manager as an employee has the sole objective of making

as much profit as possible for stockholders. If business becomes socially responsible, it

detracts attention from its responsibilities to stockholders. They are saying in essence that

business managers are not elected; they are therefore not directly accountable to the people,

but to the stockholder.

7. Business managers already have power. If they are allowed the freedom to use

organisational resources for the good of society, rather than strictly upholding the interest

of the owners, such managers are being conferred with arbitrary and dangerous powers

which they may misuse.

8. Since enterprises pay taxes to government, it would be exploitative to expect the same

organisation to also use part of their earnings in a socially responsible manner. Government

can only increase taxation on profit and let organisations focus on their major duty of being

52
responsible to their owners, thus allowing government to tackle social development

programmes.

9. Being socially responsible is an attempt to encourage a socially irresponsible government

to shirk its responsibility.

10. No matter how much is done in terms of social responsibility, many organisations will still

have problems with their locality. It is better not to start at all, as the request and desire

for more is endless and would further increase the misunderstanding between business

enterprises and the local countries. Society should appreciate that government is solely

responsible for their development and business enterprise.

Do you think social responsibility is necessary? If yes, give two reasons. If not
give two reasons also.

Yes, it is necessary because organisations tap their natural, material, and human
resources from the society so they should be responsible. Again, a better and healthy
society means a better environment for doing business. No. It is not necessary
because business organisations pay tax to government who should use that for
developmental purposes, it is therefore exploitative to ask them to be socially
responsible. Secondly, being socially responsible is an indirect way of encouraging
government to be socially irresponsible

4.1.5 Factors Responsible for Consideration of Social Responsibilities by business

i. Increased Awareness/Public opinion: There is increased awareness and people’s

opinion has changed about the role of business. Society is willing to ask a lot more

questions about the impact of business organisation on their lives.

ii. The presence of the labour movement

iii. The development of moral values and social standards applicable to businessmen.

iv. Recognition of human factors (employees) contributing to the long-term interests of

business.

53
v. The development of a professional managerial class with different motive and point of

view due to the separation of ownership from management. Business managers are also

concerned citizens.

Why do you think businesses consider being socially responsible? Give two
reasons.

The two reasons are that the society has increased knowledge about business
activities and are asking a lot more questions: and secondly the presence of labour
movement.

4.1.6 Interest Groups in Social Responsibility

These are the specific public that may lay claim to returns from the business - Stakeholders of a
business. The stakeholders are groups of people who have committed something to a business
enterprise and therefore have expectations from it. It may also be a person or persons who affect
or can be affected by the company actions. They are:
i. Consumers/Customers: To these set of groups, goods and services must be provided
at fair prices. Unethical and unfair trade practices must be avoided as consumers have
protective legislation and consumer movements termed consumerism. Where required,
after-sales services should be provided. Adequate information concerning essential
features of a product or service should be made known to consumers. Businesses must
avoid planned product obsolescence or pushing out expired goods to the consumers.
Products and services must always be provided according to consumers’ wants and
demands. Providing consumer product protection through simple but adequate
labelling/instruction especially where illiterates are predominant. Not making deceptive
and exaggerated claims of products or services.
ii. Employees: This pertains to wages and salaries, working condition, relationship
between superiors and subordinates, the work environment, as well as general employee
welfare. For instance carrying the union along in matters concerning staff welfare,
giving workers equal opportunities in hiring, pay and promotion, providing adequate
opportunity for management employee communication, providing adequate training
and development opportunity.

54
iii. Shareholders (Owners): It is the obligation of companies to ensure a fair return on
investment in terms of profit, dividend declaration, bonus, etc. In essence, the
declaration of adequate profit on capital invested ensures the survival of the company
and the delivery of the desired reward on shareholders’ risk (capital). Again, it must
also ensure equitable and fair treatment of different classes of shareholders in the
business and ensure the safety of the capital invested. Owners must be furnished with
relevant and timely information relating to the business present and proposed activities.
iv. Government: To the government, business enterprises must be law abiding, pay their
taxes and other dues fully and regularly, honestly, and when due. It should provide
accurate statistical data to the government for planning and decision making. It must
not attempt to hold back information. Get involved in research and development.
Support and contribute toward the developmental programmes of the government.
Support government policies and cause.
v. Community: Organizations owe the community the duty of ensuring the environment
is protected and not polluted, conserving the natural resources and not helping in the
extinction of vulnerable animals or materials. Employing the socially handicapped or
physically challenged and the underprivileged or deprived persons. Helping in rural
development, provision of immediate relief to victims of disasters and natural
calamities. In essence, helping in contributing towards the better life of the people in
the community through the provision of essential economic amenities such as
employment, scholarships, recreational facilities, infrastructures like good road, water,
electricity, health facilities/drugs, schools, etc. They should also donate equipment and
funds to hospitals, schools, craft villages, orphanages, endow chairs to the universities,
create and maintain good relationships within the general and local area of operation.
It is also necessary for businesses to help in the revival of the culture and heritage of
the community where they operate.
vi. Suppliers: These stakeholders must be paid promptly and in accordance with the terms
of the contract. A proper notice of specification and requirement must be given to avoid
distortion.
vii. Creditors: The creditors are those the business owns; these set of people need to be
paid promptly and according to the agreed terms so as to enable the business enjoy
credit benefits in future.

In conclusion, the objective of a business firm is no longer single (profit) but multiple in nature.
This is because the aforementioned interest groups would have to be taken care of. Peter F. Drucker

55
once said “To manage a business is to balance a variety of needs and goals”, and the company’s
management is usually at the centre to equitably distribute the rewards or resources among each of
the interest groups.

Identify any five interest groups in social responsibility

Five interest groups are the employees, shareholders, customers, government, and
Suppliers.

4.1.7 Benefits of Social Responsibility to the Organisation

The following benefits are likely to accrue to organizations practising social responsibility.

1) A better awareness of the organisation is created

2) Public opinion sways in favour of such organisation

3) There is increase in profit as more customers/public patronizes the organization

4) The organization is likely to attract socially conscious investors.

4.2 Business Ethics

4.2.1 Definition of Ethics

Pearce and Robinson (2007) refer to ethics as the moral principles that reflect society’s beliefs

about the actions of an individual or a group that are right and wrong. Ethics are principles or

standards of human conduct, sometimes called morals (Latin ‘mores’ ‘customs’), and by extension

the study of such principles is sometimes called moral philosophy. Longmans Dictionary of

Contemporary English defines Ethics as “Moral rules or principles of behaviour for deciding what

is right or wrong”. Ethics is concerned with the questions of right or wrong. For instance, ethical

questions could be “Is this act right”? “Is this act wrong”? Again, it determines the standards of

good and bad.

However, the values of one individual or group, or society may be at odds with the values of

56
another individual, group or society. Ethical standards do not reflect a universally accepted code,

but rather the product of a process of defining and clarifying the nature and content of human

interaction.

4.2.2 Ethics and the Various Aspects of Human Life

Every profession specifies some code of ethics for their members. Once you become a member

you are bound to obey or adhere, otherwise you will be sanctioned. There are certain things which

lawyers, medical doctors or accountants cannot do while practicing their professions. Usually, most

professional bodies forbid their members from advertising their services. It is believed that the

quality of the service they render should advertise them.

In the same vein, every organisation whether public or private has a code of ethics guiding them.

The codes may state how a member should conduct himself in the discharge of his official duty,

the do’s and don’ts of the organization and what they probably consider as the culture of the

organisation that must be adhered to by every member of the organisation. Conformity or

obedience to such codes is compulsory within the period the official is still in employment of the

organisation.

4.2.3 State of Ethical Standards in Nigeria

The norm in Nigeria in the past before 1999 had been that of a businessman or woman

compromising his ethical standards before getting things done. Corruption was common as it

seemed that the only way to succeed in business is the demonstration of a good understanding of

the language of bribery. Those in charge of awarding contracts in both the government and private

sectors demand gratification from contractors before doing their jobs (Olusemore, 2006). The bank

manager demands a certain percentage of money from you before granting your request for a bank

loan. For instance, an official of the defunct National Electric Power Authority (NEPA) expects

you to bribe him before fixing a damaged electric line. The police and customs officers mount

unauthorized roadblocks in order to extort money from motorists. It looked then like we had lost

57
our sense of value and justice. However, Obasanjo’s government, especially since 2003 staged a

headlong war against corruption and this is beginning to bring some measure of sanity into the

entire system (Olusemore, 2006). Today, we cannot claim corruption has been totally eradicated

in Nigeria, but within the private sector to an extent it is reduced especially with the shakeup in the

financial industry. Same cannot be said of the public sector operation even though from

government perspective they have what they call “due process” in place for the awarding of

contracts and sale of public goods; but this is yet to yield visible fruits more so as actions from

government quarters and even social comments both in the electronic and print media, have it that

high level of corruption is still evident within government and the public sector. However, recent

happenings and fall outs of the premium motor spirit (petrol) subsidy removal point to the fact that

in not too distant a time, corruption would be reduced to the barest minimum while ethical conducts

are stepped up because the society is asking lot more questions.

How would you explain the term “ethics"

Ethics are the principles or standards guiding human conduct. They are moral
rules which determine the right or wrong of a behavior.

4.2.4 Factors Encouraging Compliance to Ethics

Several reasons or factors could be adduced as to why ethical norms are followed by members of

a professional body or organizations as they perform their duties. These may be because of:

i. Their personal value system

ii. Religious beliefs

iii. The law

iv. Public opinion

v. Fear of punishment

The pressure from the sources above, among others, compel organisation’s members to confine

58
their ethical conduct within acceptable or tolerable organisational standards.

4.2.5 Causes of Ethical Compromise and Influences

There are several reasons why businesspeople compromise the value system. A businessman or

woman who always sees himself as the industry leader may want to do everything possible to

preserve the cherished position (Olusemore, 2006). That is to say, the pressure of competition often

leads people to engage in unethical practices. It may also mean that the person’s company is in bad

shape and he wants to keep it going.

Secondly, if people in the past had broken similar ethical standards and were not punished by law,

other people may likely go into it since nothing will happen. That is, if the judicial process is weak

and people can get away with any type of crime committed, then many more will be encouraged

to go into unethical practices.

Again, as the popular saying goes, “one man’s meat is another’s poison”; what is considered a vice

in one setting may be a value in another; and so, people with wrong sense of value and who engage

in unethical practice do not see certain action as a vice. Olusemore (2006), states that the wish to

succeed in a society that does not recognize hard work as a means of success can make some

businessmen to be unethical in their business behaviour.

4.2.6 Ethical Issues in Business

Olusemore (2006) identified some ethical issues in business thus.

1. Conflict of Interest: In this context a worker allows his or her personal interest to override

the official obligation.

2. Honesty and Fairness: Where dishonesty and inequity become the norm in a business

organisation as they deal with the stakeholders.

3. Communications: Ethics demand that there should not be deceitful or exaggerated claims

in any contact or communication with the public; instead, vital facts that can assist third

parties to take decisions should be disclosed.

59
4. Respect in the Workplace: Business ethics emphasizes the establishment of a work

environment in which all individuals are treated with respect and dignity. All forms of

discriminatory practices e.g. sexual harassment should be avoided. Employees on their own

should treat one another with respect.

5. Safety Policy: In an ethical organisation, the safety of the workers and customers is

paramount. The company should cultivate safety practices and put in place measures of

protection and insurance policy.

6. Fair dealing: Business operators should not take undue advantage or exert undue influence

on people through manipulation, concealment, abuse of privilege or confidential

information, misrepresentation of material facts, fraudulent behaviour or any other unfair

dealing practice.

7. Financial Statement Integrity: Business ethics states that a company should follow strict

accounting principles and standards to report financial information accurately and

completely. There should be internal checks to ensure that accounting information complies

with standard regulations and laws.

8. Compliance with the law: Businesses should comply with appropriate commercial laws

of the land such as money laundering act; exchange control regulations, etc.

There are ethical issues in business. State three

Three ethical issues in business are financial statement integrity, safety policy, and
fair dealing

Other manifestations of unethical practices include:


i. Falsification of documents
ii. Inflation of contracts
iii. Receiving payments for goods and materials not delivered or contracts not executed
iv. Forgery of payment vouchers and cheques with the assistance of some staff

60
v. Abuse of tendering procedure
vi. Printing of government security documents illegally and using same for
perpetration of fraud
vii. Selling of materials illegally withdrawn from government stores
viii. Offering gratification to public officers in order to secure a benefit
ix. Conniving with government officials by executing contracts in a shoddy manner in
order to reduce cost
x. Abandonment of contract after collecting payment.

4.2.7 Measures to Ensure Ethical Practices Are Followed

Flippo and Munsinger (1982) state that if good ethical practice must be maintained in an

organisation, management must ensure that:

a) The Code of ethics is written and not oral. This code should specify what is added to be

right or wrong within the organisation.

b) Information relating to ethical practice is not centred only on cost and profit

c) The establishment of specific job positions responsible for enforcing the ethical codes of

their organisation.

Top management act as strong role models for lower-level personnel

Summary of Study Session 4

In this Study Session, you have learnt:


1. the various definitions of social responsibility as well as the basic assumption about socially
responsible business organizations.

2. the arguments for and against social responsibility as posited by the different scholars
championing them and identified interest groups in social responsibility and what the
organization owes them.

3. the reason why organizations may likely consider socially responsible actions was also
examined as well as benefits of social responsibility to practicing companies.

61
4. the definition of business ethics,

5. the state of ethical standards in Nigeria, and factors encouraging compliance to ethics

6. the causes of ethical compromise and influence

7. ethical issues in business and measures to ensure ethical practices in the organizations.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 4


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 4.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.1, 4.2 )


In two sentences define social responsibility
SAQ 4.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.3)
Compare the arguments for and against social responsibility
SAQ 4.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.5)
State the benefits accruing to a socially responsible organisation
SAQ 4.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.6)
Define ethics and state at least three causes of ethical compromise and influence
SAQ 4.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.7)
Identify four ethical issues in business and two factors encouraging compliance to ethics
SAQ 4.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.8)
Describe measures to ensure ethical practices are followed in the organisation
SAQ 4.7 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.4)
List at least five stakeholders or interest groups in Social Responsibility

Multiple Choice Questions


From the options choose the best suited for each question.

1. Most of the socially responsible organisations are:


(a) Aware, Willing and Committed
(b) Unaware, willing, and committed
(c) Aware, lack commitment and willing
(d) unwilling, unaware, and uncommitted

62
2. According to Peter Drucker, to manage a business is to
(a) balance a variety of needs and goals
(b) make profit only
(c) be socially responsible only
(d) to produce product or service only

3. The argument against social responsibility was propounded by:


(a) Milton Friedman and others
(b) Robert F. Hansberger and Milton Friedman
(c) T.G.P Rogers and Robert F. Hansberger
(d) None of the above.

4. Social responsibility includes all except


(a) providing social amenties to the community
(b) creating a healthy environment
(c) sponsorship of sporting events
(d) non payment of taxes to government

5. Interest groups in social reponsibility include all except


(a) Consumes/customer
(b) Employees
(c) State governors
(d) Community

6. ................ states that the company should follow strict accounting principles and standards
to report financial information accurately and completely.
(a) Financial Statement Integrity
(b) Respect in the workplace
(c) Safety Policy
(d) Fair dealing
(e) Compliance with the law

7. Society expects .............................. on the part of business executives as they make


decisions which affects the lives of other people.
(a) High ethical standard
(b) Low ethical standard
(c) high numerical knowledge
(d) high management skills

8. .............. principles or standards of human conduct, sometimes called morals (Latin


‘mores’ ‘customs’) and by extension the study of such principles, sometimes called moral
philosophy
(a) Ethics
(b) Rights
(c) Justice
(d) ethics and justice
9. Top management act as strong role models for lower level personnel
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Not sure

63
10. The pressure of competition often leads people to engage in
(a) unethical practices
(b) Ethical practices
(c) social reponsibility
(d) high quality product

Links to OERs
https://openstax.org/details/books/introduction-business
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References/Suggestions for Further Readings


Isimoya, A. O. (2005) Nigerian Business Environment: An Introduction. Lagos.
Concept Publications Ltd.
Brealey, M. M. (2004) Fundamentals of Corporate Finance New York. McGraw-Hill.
Cole, E. A. (2008) Essential Economics. Ibafo Nigeria. Tonad Publishers.

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

64
STUDY SESSION 5:

ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Introduction

This session introduces you to entrepreneurship skills. The concept of entrepreneurship has

developed over the years. An exposure to entrepreneurship skills will stimulate you and others

towards different opportunities besides wage employment. Many factors have contributed to the

high unemployment rate as formal wage employment is shrinking very fast. Self-employment, also

called entrepreneurship is increasing and offering more job opportunities for people. The session

will expose you to who an entrepreneur is, characteristics of an entrepreneur, success nuggets for

entrepreneurs and types of employment and advantages of self-employment among others. As an

individual, you should endeavour to learn the basic skills involved in entrepreneurship to help you

set up your own business or enterprise. I hope you will enjoy this session. Besides, the skills you

will acquire should guide your everyday work and develop your entrepreneurial traits, motivate

you to establish your own enterprise and subsequently create jobs for others and improve upon

your quality of life and that of your families and the society at large through better job

opportunities. This session is interesting and practical. You can use the ideas and skills in your

everyday life. You will surely enjoy it!

Learning Outcomes for Study session 5

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

5.1 Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3)

5.2 Differentiate between Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship (SAQ 5.1)

65
5.3 State the characteristics of successful Entrepreneur (SAQ 5.1)

5.4 Describe the early and modern stages of entrepreneurship development in Nigeria (SAQ
5.4)

5.5 State the success nuggets for entrepreneurs (SAQ 5.3)

Key Terms: Self-employment, Entrepreneurship, Development, Entrepreneur

5.1 What is entrepreneurship?


Entrepreneurship is the attempt to create value through recognition of business opportunities, the

management of risk-taking appropriate to the opportunities, and through the communicative and

management skills to mobilize human, financial and material resources necessary to bring a project

to fruition (Olusemore, 2006).

Entrepreneurship is known as the capacity and attitude of a person or group of persons to undertake

ventures with the probability of success or failures. Entrepreneurship demands that the individual

should be prepared to assume a reasonable degree of risks, be a good leader in addition to being

highly innovative. (Onwubiko,2007).

How will you describe entrepreneurship?

Entrepreneurship is the ability of a person or group of people to embark on


ventures of creating wealth with the possibility of succeeding or failing.

5.2 Who is an entrepreneur?


An entrepreneur is a person who develops a new idea and takes the risk of setting up an enterprise

to produce a product or service which satisfies customer needs. All entrepreneurs are

businesspersons, but not all businesspersons are entrepreneurs. Let us now think of why all

businesspersons are not entrepreneurs. Think of a woman who sits by the roadside leading to your

66
home and who has been selling the same type of food, from the same size of saucepan or pot, from

the same tabletop, and may not have been able to change her standard of living to any appreciable

extent. Such a woman may be a businessperson but not an entrepreneur. The entrepreneur on the

other hand is the businessperson who is not satisfied with his/her performance and therefore always

finds ways to improve and grow.

An entrepreneur is one of the key factors of production as seen by economists and brings together

other factors of production such as land, money, materials, manpower and methods to produce

goods and services. He is a person who initiates or finances new commercial enterprises. The

Chamber’s English Dictionary defines an entrepreneur as “one who undertakes an enterprise

especially a commercial one, often at a personal financial risk”. This implies that committing his

financial resources to a project may turn out to be a failure or success. An entrepreneur could be

an inventor or innovator or both, an inventor when he invents a new product unknown in the history

of man or within his environment, an innovator when he adapts an existing invention to solve a

peculiar need.

Contillion in Isimoya (2005) defines entrepreneur as one who is the risk bearer, has the capacity

economically to produce goods and services; organizes and supervises production; and introduces

new methods and new products, and searches for new materials.

Entrepreneurs have the following motives as suggested by Schumpeter in Isimoya (2005): an innate

desire to be independent, a craving for challenge, need for self-fulfillment and glamour attached to

entrepreneurship i.e. the joy of creating wealth.

Amongst these three who is an entrepreneur? The Accountant, General Manager


or the owner?

An entrepreneur is a person who develops a new idea and takes the risk of setting
up an enterprise to produce a product or service which satisfies customer needs.
The owner is an entrepreneur.

67
5.3 The History of Entrepreneurship in Nigeria.
The Early Stage: Entrepreneurship started when people produced more products than they

needed, as such, they had to exchange these surpluses. For instance, if a blacksmith produced

more hoes than he needed, he exchanged the surplus he had with what he had not but needed;

might be he needed some yams or goat, etc; he would look for someone who needed his products

to exchange with. By this way, producers came to realize that they could concentrate in their

areas of production to produce more and then exchange with what they needed. Through this

exchange of products, entrepreneurship started. A typical Nigerian entrepreneur is a self-made

man who might be said to have strong will to succeed; he might engage the services of others like

friends, mates, in-laws, etc; to help him in his work or production. Through this way, Nigerians

in the olden days were engaged in entrepreneurship. Early entrepreneurship was characterized by

production or manufacturing in which case the producer most often started with a small capital,

most of it from his own savings. Early entrepreneurship started with trade by barter even before

the advent of any form of money.

People of the Ibo community in Nigeria are considered one of the oldest entrepreneurs in history,

their expertise stretching back to times before modern currency and trade models had developed

elsewhere on the planet (Osalor 2010). In the more recent past, Nigerians adapted their natural

talents to evolve traditional businesses and crafts that have sustained most of the country's rural

and urban poor for the better part of the last half century. While the oil boom of the '70s brought

in billions of petrodollars, most of the country's population remained untouched by the new-found

prosperity, because of widespread political corruption and catastrophic economic mismanagement.

Because of these and other factors, the World Bank estimates that 80% of oil revenues benefited

just 1% of the population (Osalor, 2010).

The Modern Stage: Modern entrepreneurship in Nigeria started with the coming of the colonial masters

who brought in their wares and made Nigerians their middlemen. In this way, modern entrepreneurship

68
was conceived. Most of the modern entrepreneurs were engaged in retail trade or sole proprietorship.

One of the major factors that have in many ways discouraged this flow of entrepreneurship

development in Nigeria is the value system brought about by formal education. For many decades,

formal education has been the preserve of the privileged. With formal education, people had the

opportunity of being employed in the civil service because in those days the economy was large

enough to absorb into the prestigious occupation all Nigerians with formal education. As such, the

system made Nigerians to be dependent on the colonial masters.

Again, the contrast between Nigerian and foreign entrepreneurs during the colonial era was very

detrimental and the competitive business strategy of the foreign entrepreneurs was ruinous and

against moral standards established by society. They did not adhere to the theory of “live and let

live”. For instance, the United African Company (UAC) that was responsible for a substantial

percentage of the import and export trade of Nigeria, had the policy of dealing directly with

producers and refused to make use of the services of Nigerian entrepreneurs. The refusal of the

expatriates to utilize the services of local businessmen inhibited their expansion and acquisition of

necessary skills and attitude. Because of this, many eventually folded up. Those that folded up built

up resentment against business which became very demoralizing to other prospective

entrepreneurs. As a result, the flow of entrepreneurship in the country was slowed down. But, with

more people being educated and the fact that the government could no longer employ most school

leavers, economic programmes to encourage individuals to go into private business and be self-

reliant were initiated. Such economic policy programmes that are geared towards self-reliance for

individuals are programmes like Open Apprenticeship Scheme, Graduate Employment

Programmes, the National Directorate of Employment, etc. Other policies that encourage or make

it easy for entrepreneurs to acquire the needed funds and train others are Peoples Bank of Nigeria,

Funds for Small-Scale Industries (FUSSI), Co-operative societies, etc, which were established to

assist entrepreneurs in Nigeria.

69
5.4 Characteristics of Successful Entrepreneurs
Now let us consider the characteristics or some special qualities and strengths which make an

entrepreneur different from a businessperson. It is important for us to note that a successful

entrepreneur possesses the following characteristics.

Initiative: An entrepreneur takes actions that go beyond job requirements or the demand of the
situation
Opportunity seeking: An entrepreneur is quick to see and seize opportunities. He/she does
things before he/she is asked to work by people or forced by situation.
Persistence: An entrepreneur is not discouraged by difficulties and problems that come up in the
business or his/her personal life. Once she sets a goal she is committed to the goal and will
become completely absorbed in it.
Information seeking: An entrepreneur undertakes personal research on how to satisfy customers
and solve problems. He/she knows that different people have different capabilities that can be of
help to him/her. He/she seeks relevant information from his/her clients, suppliers, competitors
and others. He/she always wants to learn things which will help the business to grow.
Demand for quality and efficiency: An entrepreneur is always competing with others to do
things better, faster, and at less cost he/she strives to achieve excellence.
Risk taking: Are you afraid of uncertainties? Then you cannot be an entrepreneur. Entrepreneurs
are not high-risk takers. They are also not gamblers; they calculate their risks before acting. They
place themselves in situations involving moderate risk, so they are moderate risk takers.
Goal setting: An entrepreneur sets meaningful and challenging goals for him/herself. An
entrepreneur does not just dream. He/she thinks and plans what he/she does. He/she is certain or
has hope for the future.
Commitment to work: An entrepreneur will work long hours often into the night just to be able
to keep his/her promise to his/her client. He/she does the work together with his/her workers to get
a job done. He/she knows how to make people happy to work for him/her due to his/her dynamic
leadership.
Systematic planning and monitoring: An entrepreneur plans for whatever he/she expects in the
business. He/she does not leave things to luck. He/she plans by breaking large tasks down into
small once and sets time limits against them. Since an entrepreneur knows what to expect at any
time, he/she can change plans and strategies to achieve what he/she aims at.
Persuasion and networking: An entrepreneur acts to develop and maintain business contacts by
establishing good working relationships then uses deliberate strategies to influence others.

70
Independence and self confidence: Most entrepreneurs start business because they like to be their
own boss. They are responsible for their own decisions.

We could sum up their characteristics as follows.


1. Having a high need for achievement,
2. Very optimistic and passionate about what they do,
3. Very dynamic and flexible in outlook,
4. Very innovative,
5. Very courageous,
6. Hardworking and diligent,
7. Very visionary,
8. Good decision making skill,
9. Firm determination and strong commitment,
10. Very confident,
11. Good leadership/managerial skills,
12. Creative thinking, and
13. Good persuaders.

5.5 Nigeria, Youth and Entrepreneurship


The development process of any country is determined by the way the production forces in and

around the economy is organized. For most countries, the development of industry had depended

a great deal on the role of the private sector. Entrepreneurship has played a major role in this regard.

Entrepreneurship is known as the capacity and attitude of a person or group of persons to undertake

ventures with the probability of success or failure. Entrepreneurship demands that the individual

should be prepared to assume a reasonable degree of risks, be a good leader in addition to being

highly innovative. Since entrepreneurship must deal with leadership, leadership ability always

determines a person’s level of effectiveness. Personal and organizational effectiveness is

proportionate to the strength of leadership and there is no success in any entrepreneurship venture

without leadership.

Entrepreneurship in business management is regarded as the “prime mover” of a successful

enterprise just as a leader in any organization must be the environmental change agent. Many young

71
Nigerians aspire to be successful entrepreneurs. But due to certain constraints, the ability of many

prospective youth to find avenues to utilize their opportunities and skills has proved futile.

Entrepreneurship in Nigeria is perceived as a major avenue to increase the rate of economic growth,

create job opportunities, reduce import of manufactured goods and decrease the trade deficits that

result from such imports. Two approaches have been used for entrepreneurship development in

Nigeria. One of the approaches is concerned with the provision of generous credit facilities for

small – scale industrialists. The aim of this scheme was to give the entrepreneur seed money.

The second approach was the establishment of the training centre known as Industrial Development

Centre (IDC). The idea of this Centre was to provide facilities for on- the –job training of

entrepreneurs, especially those in the informal sector which include petty traders, artisans, peasant

farmers, etc, and to train them in various aspects of industrial management. Unfortunately, due to

certain factors like absence of infrastructural facilities e.g., power, bad roads, etc, accessibility to

capital, inadequate security, low standard of education, lack of training and unethical behaviour on

the part of some officials and beneficiaries of some of the programmes among others, these and

some other initiatives did not achieve the desired results (Onwubiko, 2007).

5.6 Role of Government in Entrepreneurship Development in Nigeria


Economic growth rates are often attributed to the role of the duo of government and entrepreneurs

which is complementary and not mutually exclusive.

In Nigeria, like some other economies, government helps to develop transportation, power,

financial inducement, subsidies, and other utilities to encourage entrepreneurship development.

Furthermore, the government provides security to safeguard life and property, maintaining law and

order and freedom to do business.

According to Eshiobo (2009) the role of government in entrepreneurship development in Nigeria

became significant only after the Nigeria civil war (1967-70). From the mid-1980s there has been

increased commitment of government to entrepreneurship development especially after the

72
introduction of the Structural Adjustment Programme (SAP) in 1986. In addition, we have had the

establishment of the National Directorate of Employment (NDE), National Open Apprenticeship

Scheme (NOAS), Small and Medium Enterprise Development Agency of Nigeria (SMEDAN),

Small and Medium Enterprise Equity Investment Scheme (SMEEIS) etc (Eshiobo, 2009).

Basically, the Nigerian government should promote entrepreneurial culture through initiatives that

build business confidence, positive attitude, pride in success, support and encouragement of new

ideas, social responsibility, providing technological supports, encouraging inter-firm linkages and

promotion of R&D. Others are cheap financial resources, free access to market; prompt

registration/advisory service to businesses, promotion of entrepreneurial skills acquisition through

education and manpower development, production of infrastructure, export incentives, stable

macroeconomic environment, security of investment, stable political climate, etc. In early 2000s,

entrepreneurship studies have been introduced into the Nigerian educational system especially

higher institutions as a mandatory course. The Centre for Entrepreneurship Development (CED),

which has the objective of teaching and gingering students of higher institutions (especially in

science, engineering, and technology (SET)) to acquire entrepreneurial, innovative, and

management skills, was established. This is to make the graduates self-employed, create job

opportunities for others and generate wealth. The UNESCO-TVE Programme in Nigeria is aimed

at fostering linkage and cooperation between higher institutions and industries such that academic

research findings can readily be taken up by industries for production and product development.

What can government do to aid entrepreneurship development in Nigeria?

Government can provide infrastructures like good roads, power, financial assistance and
security of lives and properties.

73
5.7 Employment and types of employment
Employment is working to earn a living. Payment could be in the form of wages or salaries

depending on the nature of the work. Knowledge of the background to employment situation in

Nigeria will enhance your decision on your employment if you are not already employed.

The Nigerian economy has been growing; however, unemployment has become a social and

economic problem as many of our youths end up on the urban streets hawking and selling

consumables. Wage employment in the formal sector of the economy is facing decreasing

prospects even though it used to be generally responsible for the employment of graduates from

our educational institutions. As a result, many people who are preparing for wage employment will

end up unemployed, creating serious social problems for the country.

My dear learner, I do not think you want to be one of those who will be trained and end up on the

streets selling.

5.7.1 Types of Employment

Introducing you to types of employment is to help you take decisions as to the type of employment
you will want for yourself if you are not already employed, but essentially to open your eyes to the
other type of employment available. Before proceeding there is need for you to take time to ponder
over these questions.

• Who is responsible for your school fees?


• What kind of jobs do people do for the government, companies and other individuals and
get paid for regularly?
• Mention some of the activities by which people earn their own living?

There are two types of employment:

1. Self-employment: Self-employment means owning your own business alone or in


partnership with others or with members of your family. It is the alternative to wage
employment

74
2. Wage employment: Working for someone, an organisation or a company and getting paid
for the work done.

5.7.2 Motives for self-employment:

Self-employment has some motives which you need to know. You may contact somebody or

people who are already in self-employment to learn about them. However, here are a few

suggested motives for self-employment.

1. A person chooses to be self-employed if he/she has a particular interest in the trade or

business.

2. Follows a family tradition: “my grandmother was a renowned caterer. My mother and elder

sisters also are and therefore, I also want to be a caterer”.

3. Has no other option of earning a living.

4. Meeting the present and future needs.

5.7.3 Advantages of self-employment

Self-employment has several advantages. Can you think of some of them? Your list may include

any of the following. Being self-employed enables a person to:

1. lead rather than follow.

2. be creative and implement ideas.

3. have the potential for increased income with hard work.

4. be independent.

5. take initiative, make own decision at own pace;

6. control his/her own workplace and the work that needs to be done;

7. continue to learn more about business each day and this could provide an opportunity for

self-fulfillment.

8. be in business beyond retiring age, etc.

If Nigeria is to achieve the millennium goals, we need to consider going into self-employment -

75
becoming an entrepreneur.

5.8 Success Nuggets for Entrepreneurs


The following tips according to Olusemore (2006) will help make you a successful entrepreneur.
Need for a vision: You must understand what potentials, gifts and talents God has given you.

These are things you think you can do and doing very well. The vision should be written on your

heart, and you always meditate on it. Do not go into a business simply because it is the one that is

in vogue. Start a business in which you have a keen interest; you can only have an enduring success

in a business that gives your personal satisfaction.

Need for effective planning: There is no substitute to effective planning. To achieve a lot within

the time available, organize your work, plan your time, have time schedule for your work, state

what you will achieve per day, per week, per month, per year. Make a habit of ticking through what

you have achieved each day.

Need for discipline: Have a purpose and goal. Be determined to follow your plan through. Stick

to your goal despite setbacks and challenges. Discipline yourself as to the use of time and financial

resources. Organise yourself, work and plan your time. Have a time schedule for what you will

like to achieve per period and avoid time-wasters like too much time spent on telephone

conversations, unwanted visitors, unplanned social engagements, etc.

Need to endure initial hardships: You should know that visions are not achieved overnight. It is

a long term thing. Do not be in a hurry. Try and endure the initial hardships. Anything of a lasting

value would usually have a gestation period – a waiting period, a time lag between sowing and

reaping.

Need to think big but start small: Have a vision, dream big, but you can start small and watch

your enterprise grow to your dream. Do not lose sight of your mission and avoid indiscriminate

expansion of your business. Do not be attracted too often by short-term gains.

Need for courage: You need courage to succeed in life. There will always be disappointments;

when they happen, you must learn to forge ahead. A temporary setback should not discourage you;

76
only examine thoroughly where you have missed the mark and correct yourself.

Need to have a mentor: In every profession or field of human endeavour, there are always

trailblazers; there are pioneers of something. These could be people who have succeeded in

different fields and could offer advice or guidance on the new venture you intend to go into.

Need to have faith in God: You need a quantum of faith in God for you to move mountains. Men

of faith in history are always successful in their endeavours. Things may be rough and tough but

with faith and holding on to God, you can succeed.

Summary of Study Session 5

In this Study Session, you have learnt:

1) The concept of entrepreneurship and entrepreneur, special qualities and strengths which

make an entrepreneur different from a businessperson. With this as the focus, we deem it

necessary that you identify your strongest traits as you prepare to start your own business.

Tips for becoming a successful entrepreneur have also been discussed.

2) that there are two types of employment: wage and self-employment.

3) The advantages of self-employment are to lead rather than to follow, be creative, take

initiative, be independent and be in business beyond retiring age.

4) Unemployment is a social and economic problem; there is a need for more entrepreneurs

or the self-employed

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 5


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers at

the end of this course material.

77
SAQ 5.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3)
Define entrepreneur and state five characteristics of a successful entrepreneur

SAQ 5.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.2)


In not more than two sentences differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship

SAQ 5.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.5)


List and explain four success nuggets for entrepreneurs

SAQ 5.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.4)


Write short notes of not more than three sentences each on the early and modern stages of
entrepreneurship development

Multiple Choice Questions


From the options given, choose the most appropriate option to fill in the gaps.
1. ---------- demands that the individual should be prepared to assume a reasonable degree of
risks, be a good leader in addition to being highly innovative.
(a) entrepreneur
(b) entrepreneurship
(c) business man
(d) All of the above

2. ----------- is a person who develops a new idea and takes the risk of setting up an enterprise
to produce a product or service which satisfies customer needs.
(a) Business man
(b) entrepreneurship
(c) entrepreneur
(d) None of the above

3. ................ means owning your own business alone or in partnership with others or with members
of your family. (a) Self-employment (b) paid employment (c) Temporary umemployment (d)
Voluntary unemployment

4. Entrepreneurs have the following motives except


(a) innate desire to be independent
(b) craving for challenge
(c) need for self-fulfilment
(d) withdrawal in the face of difficulty.

5. Entrepreneurship is known as the capacity and attitude of a person or group of persons to


undertake ventures with the probability of success or failures.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

Links to OERs
http://EzineArticles.com/3562102
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

78
References/Suggestions for Further Readings
Olusemore, G. A. (2006). Essentials of Small Business Management. Lagos; CIBN Press
Ltd.
Eshiobo, S. S. (2009) Entrepreneurship In Innovation, Phenomena Growth Of
EnterprisesAnd Industrial Organisations In Nigeria.
www.icennig.org/ENTREPRENEURSHIP%20IN%20INNOVATION.doc
Osalor, P. O. (2010). Entrepreneurial Development in Nigeria.
http://EzineArticles.com/3562102

Onwubiko, C. M. (2007). Entrepreneurship and leadership: “Nigeria and the


Imperative for Youth Entrepreneurial Development”.
www.cipe.org/programs/women/EssaysForWeb/Onwubiko.pdf

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

79
STUDY SESSION 6:

ORGANIC FUNCTIONS AND FEASIBILITY

Introduction

In study sessions 1 to 5 you have learned about business and its environment, examined some forms

of business ownership and entrepreneurship development. In this study session, you will be taken

through the various parts of business that exist together in a seemingly natural relationship that

makes for organized efficiency. Whatever kind of business organization you have chosen to set up

even if it is the least - sole proprietorship, you will find these parts existing and working together

(may be in smaller measures and ways peculiar to the bu0siness) so that the motive for business

will be achieved. These functions include marketing, production, finance and human resources.

Businesses integrate the various functions of these departments to form an organic whole called

the business organization. In a business organization, every business idea including farming should

have a feasibility study conducted to determine the viability of the idea before proceeding with the

development of the business. Determining early that a business idea will not work saves time,

money, and heartache later.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 6

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

6.1 Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,and 6.4)

6.2 Describe the organic functions of business (SAQ 6.1, 6.2, 6.3)

6.3 State the various functions of the organic units (SAQ 6.2 and 6.3)

80
6.4 Explain feasibility study and its uses (SAQ 6.4, 6.5)

6.5 Outline the basic contents of a feasibility study (SAQ 6.4, 6.5)

Key Terms: Organic functions, feasibility, Business, Organization, Marketing,

Production, Finance, and Human Resources (HR) functions, Feasibility study

6.1 The Organic Functions of Business


A business organization has various parts working together to achieve organizational objectives.

The various functions of these departments are integrated to form an organic whole called the

business organization. These various parts of business that exist together are called the organic

business functions. The functions include marketing, production, finance, and human resources.

6.1.1 The Marketing Function

Marketing is defined as the management process which identifies, anticipates and supplies

customer requirements efficiently and profitably. This definition implies that marketing is more

than selling as the marketer must ensure that the goods or services offered must conform to

customer requirements. Marketing management is Demand management. The task of a marketing

manager therefore is to: create demand where none exists, revitalize a sagging demand, attempt to

smooth out an uneven demand, and reduce overflowing demand.

The Marketing function involves the identification of consumer needs which initiates the business

cycle. Market research is a tool for identifying and assessing consumer needs. Market research

is the process of gathering, recording, and analyzing facts and data concerned with the market, that

is:

a) What can be sold in each market?

b) Where can they be sold?


c) Who are the buyers?

81
d) What quantity can they buy?
e) What price can they pay?
f) Where can they get the product?

These questions must be answered before the product can be developed and for the business to
succeed. Hence, the marketing function embraces a wide range of sub-functions requiring special
skills.

Box 6.1 Some Sub-Functions in Marketing

Market Research
Product Planning
Public Relations
Sales and Physical Distribution
Product Advertising
Product Promotion

In any company, the marketing department and management are teamwork, and the effectiveness

of the team depends on the qualities of the team members. Let us look at two of the sub functions

in marketing.

Sales and physical distribution

The main function of a sales department is to attract and retain customers. The sales department

generates and closes deals, educates prospects, fill needs, and satisfy wants of consumers

appropriately. The sales function implies that whatever product or service an organisation decides

to provide for the satisfaction of peoples’ needs there must be ways of getting it across to the

prospective customers at a cost. In many companies, sales and distribution are a joint operation.

However, before any distribution can take place, a selling process must be evolved. The sales

department requires an imaginative or creative centre based on the marketing plan.

Customer satisfaction is very important hence the selling function includes after-sales service and

warranties, which must be well managed to eliminate buyer’s dissatisfaction. The sales department

therefore, is a living mouthpiece for any company and must be extrovert in nature to of marketing

82
channel like the intensive distribution, selective distribution, and exclusive distribution.

Product Promotion

This is an act of showcasing a good or service manufactured by a firm with the sole aim of

increasing sales within the short or long run. Companies use different techniques and

communication mediums to promote their products. They can advertise on TV, Radio, Newspaper

or use billboards or better still do personal (one on one) selling. Today, we cannot say there is one

better or best communication medium. The most effective medium will be based on what type of

product you are promoting and how you have packaged it.

In recent times, many companies have been trying to make use of online social media to promote their

product. Some of these online social media are Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube. Through these online

social media networks, companies can advertise and promote their products to anyone, at anytime and

anywhere in the world. Some companies have recorded great success marketing their products to younger

people who may not have had the opportunity of seeing them in TV or newspaper.

A business organisation uses its middlemen to ensure its product gets to customers in
various geographical locations. What organic function of business does that represent?

It represents a sub function of the marketing organic function which is sales and
distribution of goods.

6.1.2 The Production Function

Production is the process of converting raw materials into finished products. Production

function in economics is an equation that expresses the relationship between the quantities of

productive factors (such as labour and capital) used and the amount of product obtained. That is,

the production function relates the output of a firm to the amount of inputs. It states the amount

of product that can be obtained from every combination of factors, assuming that the most

efficient available methods of production are used.

83
The production function can thus answer a variety of questions. It can, for example, measure the

marginal productivity of a particular factor of production (i.e., the change in output from one

additional unit of that factor). It can also be used to determine the cheapest combination of

productive factors that can be used to produce a given output (Encyclopædia Britannica, 2012).

The decision to convert raw materials into finished product is taken after careful consideration of

many variables such as proximity to raw materials, availability of skilled labour, and ease of

transportation to market. The choice of location also affects the effectiveness of the production

function.

Types of Production Systems

Essentially, there are four types of production system. These are: Job Shop Production, Batch

production, Mass production and Process production. Each of these is explained below.

Job Shop Production System: this involves the production of a single product in line with specific

requirements. Each product is a one-off job which may not be repeated. An example is building a

ship for a client.

Box 6.2 Features of job production systems

Relatively high-priced product,


Involves the use of highly skilled labour,
Low capital cost, and
Centralization of management.

What organic business function will ensure that products and services reach the
customers and that sales or customer base increases through awareness?

The marketing organic function

Batch Production System: This involves the production of a batch or quantity of a product to

meet a specific need e.g., production of goods for stocks, such as components for the motor car

84
industry or aero plane. Here, production operatives are less skillful than the job production

operatives.

Mass Production System is the production of products that are uniform and standardized in

nature. Production is continuous and the units produced are the same and specialized. Examples

are toilet soaps, ball pens and rulers. Mass production system is a large-scale production. It

therefore requires the existence of a well-developed marketing organization to make continuous

production possible.

Box 6.3 Features of Batch Production System

Relatively low price,


High capital cost,
Little flexibility,
High population of semi and unskilled labour required, and
Less centralization in management.

Process Production System: This is where the production is continuous but with a high degree
of automation than in mass production e.g. oil and chemical industries. It is highly capital
intensive.

Scope of Production Function


Depending on the organization, the production function can be subdivided into: Production

Administration, Production Design, Production Management and Production Ancillaries.

An organisation intends to determine the amount of product that can be obtained


from a given combination of factors of production. Recommend what organic
business function will handle that.

I will recommend the Production organic function whose duty is to relate the
output of a firm to the number of inputs.

6.1.3 The Finance Function

The basic objective of the finance function is to formulate policies ensuring that the most effective

use is made of the financial resources of the organization. It assists the company to make use of

85
the funds at its disposal and to select the most favourable sources of additional funds to finance

future operations.

Accounting provides the source of information for financial analysis and planning. Accountants

measure such variables as performance, sales expenses, profits, assets and liabilities and express

their findings in numerical terms. This is then communicated to individuals, management and all

interested parties both in and outside the enterprise.

Financial Accounting is part of the finance function. It takes care of preparing the company’s

balance sheet, profit and loss account and the manufacturing accounts in the case of manufacturing

companies.

Balance Sheet: indicates the wealth of a company at a certain point in time. It presents the picture

of the cause of profit or loss over the period of one balance sheet data to another. It is used for the

calculation of liability for corporate tax, dividends to shareholders and changes in retained profits.

Profit & Loss Account: This shows the addition to wealth which has been made over a period. It

is a statement of operations over a defined period of time and shows the revenue earned during the

period i.e., 12 months, cost of goods sold, other expenses incurred, taxes and rates paid, and the

profit or loss resulting from the operation at that period.

1.1.4 The Human Resources Function

Human Resources (HR) deal with people at work and their relationship within the working

environment. The Human Resources approach further deals with the employee’s entire working

life in the company, and not just their contractual relationship with it. It is also involved with

values and aims of their commitment to management goals.

The HR function (Personnel Management and Industrial Relations) is a critical function performed

in any organization of human effort. Plants, office computers and machines are unproductive

except for human effort and direction. Managing the human component is the central and most

important part because everything depends upon how well it is done.

86
The Human Resources function involves:

• Recruitment and Selection,

• Training and Retraining,

• Remuneration of employees,

• Formulating of personnel policies and procedures,

• Acting as a clearing house for information about employee’s conducts, attitude towards

management, the job and the firm,

• Assisting line managers with employee problems e.g. promotions, transfers, demotions,

discharges, etc

• Prepare job analysis and evaluation for each position in the firm, and

• Collective bargaining negotiation

Name five functions of the Human Resources department of an organization.

The Human Resources department is responsible for remuneration of workers; preparing


job analysis and evaluation for each position; recruitment and selection; training and
retraining; and formulation of personnel policies and procedures

6.2 Feasibility Study and Business


Feasibility study is a preliminary study undertaken to determine and document the viability of a

project. Project here could mean a fresh business idea, or an identified opportunity. It is a thorough

evaluation of how practicable a business project would be. Feasibility study provides information

about the various elements or characteristics which form the basis of the business proposal. It is an

analysis of how worthwhile a business idea is. The feasibility study focuses in helping to answer

87
essential questions such as “Should we proceed with the proposed project idea?”

A feasible business venture is one where the business will generate adequate cash flow and profits,

withstand the risks and challenges it will encounter, remain viable in the long term and meet the

goals of the founders/owners. The venture can be a new start up business, the purchase of an

existing business, an expansion of current business operation or a new enterprise for an existing

business.

A business man approaches you, tells you of his intention to take advantage of a
presumed opportunity but is entertaining fear on the success or otherwise of it.
Advise him.

I will advise him to conduct a feasibility study as that is the only way to determine
the success/viability or otherwise of any business venture.

6.2.1 Role or Uses of Feasibility Study

1. A feasibility report helps to determine the viability of the project and the degree of risk
associated with investing in it.
2. Evaluates alternatives. After a business entrepreneur has discussed series of business
ideas or scenarios, the feasibility study helps to ‘frame’ and ‘flesh-out’ specific business
alternatives so they can be studied in depth and the best alternatives chosen.
3. Aids decision making in terms of financing the project.
4. Is used to evaluate the profitability and technical practicability of the project.
5. It guides the general implementation of the project plan.
6. Is used to seek for business loan from bank. An organization may not be granted credit
if it is unable to produce a convincing feasibility report stating the future plans of
income for the organization. This is because banks expect that the business will repay
the loan from the future streams of income as stated in the feasibility study.

Outline three roles or uses of feasibility study.

88
Feasibility study could be used to aid decision making especially concerning
financing of the project. It could also be used to determine if a project is profitable
and practicable, and it guides the general implementation of the project.

6.2.2 Contents of a Business Feasibility Study

The success of a feasibility study depends on the careful identification and assessment of all the

important issues for business success. Bear in mind that the premise of feasibility study is to

determine the potential for success of a proposed business venture.

The following outline can help you create your study. Not all feasibility studies are alike. The

elements to include in a feasibility study vary according to the type of business venture and the

market, therefore the listing below may not be a complete listing of the factors that should be

considered in your specific situation but may aid you to think and add further issues that needs to

be assessed in your own specific business. These are:

Brief Description of the Project and its Objective


Describing the project and its objective briefly entails stating the name of the business, the type of

business (partnership, sole proprietorship, Limited Liability Company, etc) and the industry to

which the business belongs e.g. food and beverage industry, agricultural industry, textile and

clothing industry, banking industry among others.

Ownership
Here, you are expected to provide the name(s) of the promoters or proprietors of the business, their

origin (whether indigenes or foreigners), their business experience, what they do currently, their

skills and ability. This element will also include the ownership structure in case more than one

person owns the organisation.

The Product or Service


This entails describing the product or service you want to deliver to the consumers and the nature

of the product or service. You need to state whether it is a consumer good or an industrial good,

whether it is an intermediate or final product, the uses of the product or its importance to the

89
consumer, and the particular segment of the market it will serve.

Production Process and Production Plan


In this segment, you will need to state the production process you wish to adapt whether large or

small scale depending on the business and the machines to be used. The production plan should

highlight how and where the machinery and raw materials are to be procured; give full description

of the raw materials required, the quantity required to produce certain units, capacity of the

machine(s) in terms of volume of production, and also address quality standards and controls, etc.

The Market for the Product


It is necessary to describe the market you want to operate in. Will it be the wholesale or retail, local

or international market? There is need to also state the current situation of the market? Is it a

growing or saturated market? Who are the major competitors and major buyers in the market?

What market niche do you want to carve for the product?

The Marketing Plan/Strategy


Having known the characteristics of the market you want to operate in, you should describe how

you want to compete in the market. How do you intend to obtain a reasonable share of the market?

What is the distribution and promotion plans you wish to adopt? How do you make consumers

who have been buying similar or substitute products prefer your product and spend their money on

your product? State also the medium of promotion and publicity you intend to use and the pricing

policy you wish to adopt.

Technical Feasibility
How do you get the right technical people and workers to match the kind of organization you have

in mind and the machines. This entails determining facility needs e.g. The size and type of

production machines, how suitable are they? Are they reliable? Who are the experts to man the

machine and how do you intend to employ them? What are the constraints or limitations of the

technology? Is the technology likely to contribute to pollution or otherwise damage the

environment?

90
Land/Property
Do you need land or property? What acre or size of the virgin land do you require? What is the

location you are targeting? What is the estimated cost? What security does the land/property have

e.g. Certificate of Occupancy, Deed of Assignment/Conveyance? Will the land be suitable for the

business? If it is a property, what is the size you need? Where should it be located? What kind of

infrastructure do you expect around that area to suit your business needs.

Organization and Management


This will explain how the business will be organized, the kind of structure or chart to be put in

place e.g. drawing out the organizational chart detailing the line of report and authority and the

various departments. For instance, figure 4.3.1 may represent the structure of an organization in

terms of layers and levels.

MD

GM

Manager Manager Manager Manager


Administration Product Accounts personnel

Administrative Product Account HR


Officers supervisor Officers Officers

Fig. 6.1: Organizational Structure/Chart

It is also necessary to state the members’ background and work experience of members of the

management as this is important to assess if they are capable of managing the business and

performing their assigned roles or otherwise. This is also important because the financiers are

interested in knowing that the management team is highly rated and there is market for the

91
product/service. You should also talk about the workforce (labour), the number of senior or junior

staff required etc.

Economic or Financial Feasibility


This requires stating the estimated total capital needs or requirements which is divided into capital

expenditure & working capitals. Capital expenditure takes care of capital items like plant and

machinery, land and building, tools, office furniture and fixtures, motor vehicles, etc. The working

capital or startup capital which is the anticipated expenditure before revenues are realized will also

be stated. This includes anticipated payment for labour (wages and salaries), utilities, rent,

suppliers, repairs, raw materials, administration expenses, production overhead and other expenses

at the initiation of business. Financial feasibility also entails making financial projections and

profitability analysis, that is, having a budget of the estimated expected costs and revenue or returns

and stating the profit margin and expected net profit. It also requires estimating the unit of sales

needed to break even, estimating the returns under various production price and sales level, and

identifying the “best case” or “worst case” scenarios. Again, you need to state the reliability of the

underlying assumptions of the financial analysis.

Generally, there should be a projected income statement or cash flow statement. This income

statement summarizes the estimated operating expenses and operating revenue, and shows the net

profit or loss. The net profit is the return on investment. When it is lower than the expected level,

the project might be termed unviable or not feasible.

Summary of Study Session 6

In this Study Session, you have learnt:

1) the four basic organic functions of business. These are marketing, production, finance and

the human resources. The marketing function is responsible for meeting consumer’ desires

in terms of product and services, ensuring that products get to the end users and that goods

and services get adequate promotion.

92
2) the production function ensures that input yields the required output and the method of

production is also determined by it. Finance function ensures that funds are judiciously

used in order to attain organizational objective. The Human resources coordinates the use

of all other resources. In essence, in the execution of all these functions, the human resource

has a central role to play and must give necessary training and development. In addition

3) the meaning of feasibility study and identified it as a veritable tool for determining the

viability, practicability and profitability or otherwise of a business project. The role of

feasibility study which includes using it as a means of securing loans from banks and the

evaluation of alternative ideas among others.

4) the basic content of a feasibility study which includes ownership, finance, market,

marketing plans, product, and production plan.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 6


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig
outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and
discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers
at the end of this course material.
SAQ 6.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, and 6.2)
Discuss briefly the four organic functions of business.
SAQ 6.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, 6.2, and 6.3)
The marketing function embraces a wide range of sub-functions requiring special skills.
State three of such sub-functions
SAQ 6.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, 6.2, and 6.3)
List and explain the four subdivisions of the production function.
SAQ 6.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.4 and 6.5)
What are the basic contents of a feasibility study? Itemize and write short notes on at least
three using not more than two sentences each.
SAQ 6.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.5)
State briefly the contents of a financial statement in a feasibility study

Multiple Choice Questions


From the alternatives provided, choose the most appropriate option

93
1. One of the following is not a function of marketing:
(a) market research
(b) product planning
(c) physical goods distribution
(d) None of the above

2. This involves the production of a uniform and standardized nature.


(a) Batch production
(b) Mass Production
(c) Few Production
(d) None of the above

3. Managing the ..............component is the central and most important part of an organization
because everything depends on how well it is done.
(a) Marketing
(b) Human

(c) Production

(d) Financial

4. ........ involves the production of a batch or quantity of a product to meet a specific needs.
(a) Mass production
(b) Process production
(c) Batch production
(d) Tailor-made production.

5. In this production system, production is continuous but with a high degree of automation than
in mass production
(a) Batch Production
(b) Job shop production
(c) Process Production
(d) All of the above

6. In feasibility study .......... will explain how the business will be organized, the kind of structure
or chart to be put in place.
(a) Organization & Management
(b)Economic and Financial analysis
(c) Market for the product
(d) Marketing plan

7. -------- provides information about the various elements or characteristics which form the basis
of the business proposal.
(a) Feasibility study
(b) Business plan
(c) organised study
(d) All of the above

8. Capital expenditure include all except


(a) Marchenery
(b) Building

94
(c) land
(d) wages and salary

9. ............................... requires stating the estimated total capital needs or requirements which
is divided into capital expenditure & working capitals.
(a) Financial feasibility
(b) Capital feasibility
(c) profit and loss feasibilty
(d) balance sheet feasibility

10. ........................... is the process of determining facility needs through showing size and type
of production machines, stating its suitability as a production technology, and showing how reliable
it is are part of the requirements for effective operations.
(a) Economic feasibility
(b) Technical feasibility
(c) Budgeting feasibility
(d) business plan

Links to OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References/Suggestions for further reading


Ifechukwu, J.A.O. (2006). How To Prepare A Feasibility Report and Establish your
own Business. 3rd Edition. Lagos. Goldland Business Co. Ltd.
Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An introduction. Lagos;
Concept Pub. Ltd.
Encyclopaedia Britannica (http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/477999/production-
function). Accessed March 2012

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

95
STUDY SESSION 7:

CHALLENGES OF MANAGING BUSINESS IN NIGERIA

Introduction

The factors affecting the smooth operation of business in an environment could be regarded as the

challenges faced in managing such business. These challenges differ from business to business as

well as from environment to environment. In the Nigerian environment we will like to look at those

peculiar challenges that most business managers have to deal with in their day-to-day operation.

The relevant words here are: Challenges, Business and Management. It will be appropriate to

understand the meaning of these words before proceeding.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 7

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

7.1 Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3)

7.2 Describe the challenges of business management (SAQ 7.3)

7.3 Explain the factors that affect business operation in Nigeria (SAQ 7.2)

Key Terms: Business management, challenges, management, environment, sole


proprietorship, Poor Infrastructure, Unstable Government Policy, Irregular Power Supply,
High rate of Inflation.

96
7.1 Definition
Let us make an effort to define each of the relevant word identified by starting with challenges.

There are several definitions to the word. For our study, we would use the third definition of the

Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English which gives the meaning of Challenges as “The

test of the abilities of a person, or thing”. So, we assume that anything that tests one’s ability to do

something (say a kind of job) must be challenging. Normally things we are used to doing, no longer

tests our abilities because it is established that we can do it. Therefore, we could further say that

challenges are obstacles, obstructions, difficulties, opposition, hindrances, hurdles that

businesspeople face. Most people claim they like challenges, and so you won’t be surprised to hear

people say such things as “I’d like a challenging job”; “I like to study something only if it really

challenges me”; etc. So, whatever this sort of person wants to get involved in, will really have to

test their ability to achieve or overcome. In the past, businesses were faced with the challenges of

land, labour, and capital but all that has changed now. See what IBM CEO Louis V. Gerstner Jr

once said.

“The age-old levers of competition which are land, labour capital is being supplemented by knowledge.

Only firms that can exploit knowledge and act fast or with speed can succeed”.

Business as a word has also been defined in various ways by various people. Some have defined

Business “As an organisation set up to make profit”; others describe it as “an organization

consisting of a person or a group of persons who produce and distribute goods and services for

profit”. Karimu (1992) defines business as “the sum of all the legal activities involved in the

creation and distribution of goods and services for private profit”. Therefore, business is any legal

means of satisfying human wants with the motive of profit.

Management as a term or word means different things to different people depending on its usage.

Some refer to it as “Those at the top level of an organisation”, that is, the decision makers in an

97
organisation. Mary Parker Follet defines management as “art (i.e. skill, ability) of getting things

done through other people”. However, the definition of Mondy et al will suffice here. Mondy,

Holmes and Flippo (1983) defined management as the process of planning, organizing,

influencing, and controlling to accomplish organisational goals through the coordinated use of

human and material resources. We could then visualize management from two perspectives –

people at the top level/decision makers (managers) who ensure that organizational objectives are

achieved through the efforts of people (workers) and other relevant resources.

Challenges of business management therefore are those issues, factors, conditions, situations,

uncertainties which test the abilities of business managers as they work towards satisfying

human wants and in return make profit.

Environmental uncertainties entails that there is lack of complete information regarding what

developments will occur in the external environment. This makes it difficult to predict future

situation and to understand their potential implications. For instance, the current world recession

that started in 2007 in the US from real estate (housing market), affected banks and led to layoff

of workers, resulted to low credit within the economies thereby making it impossible for businesses

to secure loans. It also affected the stock market and so many lost their investments while the

unemployment rate increased generally.

Isimoya (2005) has said that managing business organisations in Nigeria is not for the faint-hearted.

Business in Nigeria is for those who are willing to take risks or face challenges and also savour the

benefits that result from such successful undertaking. Olusemore (2006) added that “the Nigerian

Environment has always been challenging and no one should use it as excuse for business failure”.

So, if anyone cannot face challenges or take risks (as they have always been there and would

98
continue to be there) that person should not go into business. And if one is in business and fails,

the person shouldn’t say it’s because of the challenges faced, as challenges were there even before

embarking upon the business.

7.2 Types of Business Organization

What are the types of business organizations? Remember you learned something about

types of business organisations in study session 4.

The types of business organisations are sole proprietor, partnership, Limited Liability

Company, corporation, and cooperative societies.

There are various types of business organisations as we were told in the previous module viz: Sole

Proprietorship, partnership, limited liability companies, public corporations, cooperative societies

etc. In a sole proprietorship, the key person or the manager is usually the owner of the setup. In

a partnership, the active managers are likely to be the owners except where there is an agreement

to employ somebody other than the partners. Limited Liability Companies are divided into two –

Public and Private. The private companies are usually family-owned businesses while the public

companies are the multinationals with public quoted shares. Public corporations are government

established enterprises or owned companies. The most prevalent in our country are the first two –

sole proprietorship and partnership, that is to say, mostly small scale businesses.

Businesses as we know do not operate in a vacuum. They operate within a given environment and

these environments influence business just as business influences the environment. To help you

recall we have two types of environments viz; the internal and external environments.

The internal environments are generally regarded as the controllable environment, which is

otherwise termed the strengths and weaknesses of an organization. They include such factors like

99
resources (financial and material), the employees, product, price, promotion, place of distribution,

work ethics (prompt response to customer needs, after sales service), the work climate (how

friendly and conducive it is), the leadership style/decision making process, communication style,

structure of the organization (who reports to who) size of the organization, and organizational

culture.

The external environment is regarded as the uncontrollable environment otherwise seen as the

opportunities and threats of an organisation. The external environment is divided into two: Macro

(General Environment) and Micro (Specific or Task Environment). The Macro environment must

deal with the environment that applies to all businesses in general. For instance, the political,

economic, social, technological issues that is common to all kinds of businesses. For instance, the

issue of computerization in all spheres of business is a general environment under technological

issues that is affecting virtually all business as managers’ work hard to make the running of their

business easy and faster using computers. Any organisation that should be using a computer for its

operation currently that is not doing so will have itself to blame as the customer may not want to

listen to excuses. Microenvironment has to do with the stakeholders of a particular business. That

is, people or persons, or groups, institutions who are affected by the performance of the

organisation. Consequently, the external environment includes factors such as government

regulations through its regulating agencies, cultural or social changes, economic conditions in

terms of market forces (supply and demand), sources of funds, income, population increase or

decrease, customers, technological changes, competitors, trade union activities, suppliers,

distributors, etc.

Environmental factors as we know vary from country to country, even region to region. The

environment of business, therefore, is an extremely complex and dynamic one and the challenges

of business management lies essentially in the external factors or the uncontrollable factors, since

an organization may have control over its internal factors. For instance, an organization can alter

or modify factors such as the workforce or personnel, physical facilities, organizational and

100
functional means like the marketing mix to suit the environment, but may not be able to alter

external factors like interest rate, inflation rate, policies on import and export, etc.

7.3 Factors militating against Business Operations in Nigeria


The success or otherwise of a business entity depends to a large extent on its adaptability to the

external environment. If a business could properly design and adjust the internal (controllable)

variables to take advantage of the opportunities that exists in the external environment and manage

the threats, such business has a higher tendency to succeed.

Of the two environments (internal and external) which is likely to drive an organisation
out of business and why?

The external environment is likely to drive an organisation out of business since it cannot
control it. If for instance there is an economic policy that’s unfavourable to business,
business needs to modify its internal resources to adapt to the policy, where it cannot do
so, business may fail.

Some of the peculiar challenges faced by Nigerian business operators as enunciated by Olusemore

(2006) which could be grouped under the external environments mentioned above are:

i. Unstable Government Policy: Government policies are often unstable and

inconsistent especially in the past because of political instability. This affects planning

and decision making. Examples are policies on import and export, fiscal and monetary

policies, policies on licensing, monopolies, foreign investment, distribution and pricing

and their controlling, customer protection policies, etc. Business organizations need to

be on their toes and keep their ears to the ground in order to know when policies that

will impact on their businesses are to be changed. This challenge could be grouped

under political and regulatory environment.

101
ii. Poor Infrastructure: Facilities such as roads, rail, air transport, schools, health

facilities, water, etc, if not in good shape will affect everyone whether a businessperson

or not. As for businesspeople, bad roads, deficient rail or air system, lack of usable or

portable water will affect the cost of doing business. Bad roads for instance, will cause

heavy traffic jams thereby increasing the number of hours spent going for a business

deal as well as put the vehicles under stress and thereby reducing the life span of

vehicles. It will also increase the cost of transportation thereby adding to the cost of

doing business. If the roads are good and smooth and the rail system is fixed, business

operators can have a choice of cheaper transport to use so as to reduce cost of business

as well as prices of goods or services pushed to the society. Again, a healthy people or

nation in other words means a healthy environment for doing business. An uneducated

nation is blind and would not appreciate business provisions. Lack of water means

incurring cost by business operators as boreholes will be sunk, pumping machines,

tanks, and generators for operating the machines will be bought. This automatically

adds to the cost of doing business. Poor infrastructure falls under the economic

environment.

iii. Irregular Power Supply: Most businesses currently operate on generator almost

twenty-four hours daily. Notwithstanding that there has been a change in name from

National Electric Power Authority (NEPA) to Power Holding Company of Nigeria

(PHCN), there is no change in services or in supply. Business has to cope with the cost

of purchasing generator, powering with the appropriate petroleum product (cost of

products unstable), servicing and maintaining it, and of course repairing when it is

faulty. All of these will add to the cost of the final product or service to the end users.

This factor can be classified under economics.

102
iv. Inflation/High Cost of Doing Business: Inflation is the pervasive and sustained rise

in the aggregate level of prices measured by an index of the cost of various goods and

services. Repetitive price increases erode the purchasing power of money and other

financial assets with fixed values, creating serious economic distortions and

uncertainty. The Nigerian government since 1999 has been making efforts to control

the high rate of inflation from two-digit inflation to one-digit inflation. This has been

difficult probably due to the fact that they say one thing and mean another. For instance,

the government has gradually been withdrawing subsidies in the power and petroleum

sector which has in turn led to increase in power tariffs and pump price of petroleum

products and general increase in production or business overheads. Constant increase

in petroleum product prices neutralizes government efforts in reducing inflation and

cost of doing business rates. Illicit roadblocks or check points and toll collection by

various law enforcement agencies and private revenue collection groups which makes

the movement of goods and services very difficult also add to overhead costs.

v. Low level of Savings/Spending: Economic growth is slow even though government is

working through the National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy

(NEEDS) to stimulate growth. Price levels are high and people only spend on essential

goods and services (food, shelter, clothing, education etc.); therefore, little or nothing

is reserved for savings. The level of savings and spending is low and this is not good

enough for business, especially those who are into some of the goods and services

considered not-too-essential for human survival. Again, low savings implies that the

interest rate on lending will be very high. Business people who will like to borrow funds

from banks will have to repay with so much interest, and at the end of the day, they will

add the cost of funds to their total cost and that in essence shoots up the prices of their

commodities or services to the users.

103
Would you consider as challenges of business operation in Nigeria, the inability of
a company to get its product across to its very many consumers because of lack of
medium or means of transportation and in the process lose some customers to
competitors?

The duty of a company to make its product and services available to its end users
is purely an internal one and cannot be seen as a real challenge because they can
improve on their distribution process if they so desire.

vi. Multiple Taxes/Levies: The probability of receiving different types of bills from local

and state governments when you set up a shop or business is not favourable. This is

outside of the compulsory business income tax and utility bills paid. For instance, if

you operate where there is pipe borne water, you will need to pay water rate, you will

also pay electricity bills which of course in some instances are estimated bills especially

if you do not have a meter (as there appears to be no standard measures for estimating

energy consumption). In cases even where there is meter, PHCN may still bring

estimated bills that are in most instances greater than what should be the actual

consumption for a month and could proceed to disconnect electricity supply based on

one’s inability to pay such estimates. Business operators aggregate all these costs and

add them to the final prices rolled out to the consumers.

vii. Inability to access Bank Funds: The claim by many that it is difficult especially for

small businesses to access commercial bank loans to a large extent is correct. This is

since call for collaterals often pose difficulties to the borrower who is unable to gather

the requirements. Again, banks were more comfortable trading on the funds on a short-

term basis than lending to the real sector. The reason for this may not be far-fetched

since before the beginning of the CBN imposed recapitalization and consolidation

exercise of 2005, the income of banks was largely on a short term basis (e.g. tenured

funds of 30, 60, and 90 days) and so, banks cannot grant long term loans (which are

104
what manufacturers and real business people need) when they receive short term funds

from depositors. Currently, with the recapitalization exercise, it is likely that banks are

more poised to lend long term since their shareholding base has increased.

viii. Security: The issue of insecurity of the business property and place has necessitated

the employment of security men and security gadgets like burglary proofs, CCTVs,

high fenced walls etc. Ordinarily in secured economies, the normal locking of a

business premises should suffice; but where costs must be incurred on further security

measures, this adds up to the cost of doing business. Therefore, the issue of security is

a big challenge to business managers in Nigeria as there may be need to further secure

their business through the employment of security guards and putting other security

measures in place. This belongs to the social environment.

ix. Competitors: The activities of competitors also pose a challenge to businesses. Except

if a business is monopolistic, it is sure to have competitors who will spare nothing to

ensure they have a firm grip of the market. Therefore, business managers must be

careful the kind of decision they make toward their customers, for example, in raising

of commodity prices and distribution of their products and services. Competitors may

take advantage of the situation. More so, there are influxes of fake products nowadays:

businesses will always strive to distinguish their products as genuine and give their

customers reason to believe and prefer their products.

x. Suppliers: Any business of production or manufacturing cannot long operate

effectively unless it is continually supplied with needed raw materials. Lack of adequate

and prompt supply can reduce or even cause cessation of operations even though the

firm has sufficient capital and employees. A supplier’s inability to meet material

105
specification and supply deadlines (e.g. where there is a lead time) is a great challenge

to business owners.

xi. Customers: These are the people who use a firm’s product and services. They are

considered very important in the existence of an organization. Their satisfaction is

paramount in the organization’s activities. It is important that business should always

endeavor to sniff out customers’ needs and what satisfies them. It demands being

innovative and creative in modifying products and services. It also means giving them

quality goods at low costs. Business also needs to ensure that their practices or activities

do not in any way antagonize or put off any section or segment of the market it serves

whether in its product, price, place (distribution) or promotion and even in its

employment practices. For instance, the MTN’s “Mama na boy” advert triggered some

sentiments among the female activists who called for a stop to that advert and threatened

to mobilize against MTN for acknowledging the boy child like it is the more important

of gender. Trying to meet the ever-changing taste of customers is crucial as customers

are constantly demanding high quality products and improved services. Failure to do

so will cause the firm to cease its existence. Against this background, customers are a

very big challenge to business and every business worth its salt will always work

towards the dictate of its customers.

xii. Corruption: The issue of corruption cuts across all facets of society of which business

is a sub-set. Corruption could pose a challenge to business as sometimes those into

supply or contract business will have to pay more to secure or get a contract. In the

banking industry way back in the 80s and 90s for instance, business cannot secure loans

from banks except they are willing to pay the bank manager some percentages. So, it

was also with the government ministries where 10% or more will have to be paid by

106
the contractor before he could be awarded the contract or supply. This usually adds to

the cost of doing business.

xiii. Trade Union: The issue of unionism may apply to businesses and organizations with

large numbers of staff. Trade union consists of employees who have joined together for

the purpose of presenting a united front in dealing with management. Unions are a

challenge to organizations because they essentially become a third party when dealing

with the organisation. It is the union rather than the individual employee that negotiates

the agreement with the firm. Their activities often run contrary with that of

management. Agitations by unions and the actions thereafter may jeopardize the

successful achievement of objectives. For instance, NLC in 2007 went about picketing

some organizations over casualization of staff. Other actions include strikes, work to

rule, etc. The activities of unions therefore pose a challenge to the organization. Its

ability to manage and contain union activities will assist in not giving the organisation

a bad name or image.

A company that produces goods used by both male and female customers is insisting on
having in its employ only male workers. What do you think might happen to that business
if care is not taken?

It might face resentment of its products by female customers since their action might be
viewed from gender angle. They can mobilize and ask female customers to stop
patronizing the company.

xiv. Stockholders or Shareholders: These are individuals who own and share in an

organisation’s profit or loss. These people are vitally interested in the firm’s operating

efficiency. The price of the stock and the dividends paid are also of major concern to

stockholders. The managers may operate the firm, but they must constantly be sensitive

107
to the stockholders needs since in the real sense they own the company. Shareholders

are a challenge because they have monetary investment in the firm and are interested in

value added to their shares. Stockholders may at times challenge programmes

considered beneficial to the organization by management. They want to know how the

new programme will grow their funds, translate to higher dividends etc. So, business

managers may be forced to justify the merits of a particular programme in terms of how

it will affect future projects, otherwise shareholders may engage in stockholder activism

by forming cliques to alter the project. Businesses must then strive to carry shareholders

along with them always.

xv. Technology: Every business organisation must be mindful of the changes prevalent in

the technology that affects its business. Technology is very dynamic and should be

taken seriously. Any business operating in the past whilst its technology has gone

forward would be doing a disservice to itself as it is heading toward extinction. For

instance, the issue of on-line, real-time banking swept on the banks like a wind; and

both the new and old generation banks had to follow otherwise they would lose most

of their customers to the vibrant banks.

xvi. Area of Business Operation: The socio-cultural issue of the population a business is

serving is very important. The area where the business is cited matters so much in the

activities and survival of a business. The area of business operation poses a great

challenge to business managers especially if it is a volatile area where it is difficult to

determine what happens next. For instance before Zamfara state became a sharia state,

there were hospitality businesses existing there, but as soon as it was proclaimed a

sharia state and alcohol and drinks were banned in the state, such businesses had to

relocate or change their line of business. Again, businesses in the Niger Delta region

may have greater challenge as kidnapping, hostage taking, vandalization etc, make it

difficult for business operation.

108
Summary of Study Session 7

In this Study Session, you have learnt:

1) that managers of businesses face challenges in the cause of using the resources at their

disposal to meet organizational objectives.

2) that businesses need to properly design and adjust their internal (controllable) environment

to be able to take advantage of the opportunities that exist in the external environment as

well as overcome the challenges or threats posed by the environment since it cannot control

it.

3) the success or otherwise of a business entity depends to a large extent on its ability to stand

tall to the identified challenges.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 7


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 7.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.1 and 7.2)


Briefly explain the following concepts, challenges, business and management

SAQ 7.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.3)


List and discuss five of the external factors affecting business operation in Nigeria
SAQ 7.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.2)
Define challenges of business management as a phrase
Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the most correct options.

1. Shareholders/Stockholders are all except


(a) invested in an organization
(b) share in the profit and loss
(c) attend AGM meeting
(d) participate in the management of the company

109
2. The activities of competitors will not pose a challenge to business if only it is
(a) perfect competition
(b) monopolistic competition
(c) Monopolistic
(d) oligopolistic competition

3. The challenges of business management lie in all exept


(a) unstable political environment
(b) complexity of the external environment
(c) stability of the environment
(d) inconsistencies in government policies

4. .................... are considered very important in the existence of any organization.


(a) customers
(b) managers
(c) Suppliers
(d) Government

5. Following are some of the factors that militate against businesss operations in Nigeria
except.
(a) unstable government policy
(b) poor intrastructure
(c) constant electric supply
(d) low level of savings/spending

Links to OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References and Suggestions for further reading


Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An introduction. Lagos;
Concept Pub. Ltd.
Karimu, B. O. (1992). Business Management: An introduction. Lagos. Mufab (Nig.)
Press ltd.
Mondy, R. W., Holmes, R. E., and Flippo, E. B. (1983). Management, concepts and
practices. 2nd Edition. Boston. Allyn and Bacon
Olusemore, G. A. (2006). Essentials of Small Business Management. Lagos; CIBN Press
Ltd.
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

110
Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

111
STUDY SESSION 8:

OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS, AND BUSINESS FAILURE

Introduction

All organizations are affected by the general components of the external environment we talked

about in challenges of business management. These environments create opportunities or threats

to organizations depending on their ability to utilize their innate strengths rather than weaknesses.

This explains the fact that businesses or organizations function in a closer, more immediate

competitive environment. For us to identify business opportunity or threat requires us to conduct

situational or environmental analysis or be alert to happenings around our environment. A business

should be concerned about opportunities and threats simply to ensure organizational success. This

can be done by formulating and developing an effective strategy. One vital way of doing this is by

consistently conducting a SWOT analysis. SWOT entails asking questions and providing answers

to such questions.

Box 8.1

Albert Einstein once said “The important thing is not to stop questioning”. That is, we must continue to
ask questions and continually seek knowledge.

It is very important to examine why certain businesses fail so that we can learn from their mistakes

and take guidance from the successful ones. Many businesses fail because of some common causes

which many entrepreneurs ignore at the onset and in the course of the business. Others fail because

of environmental influences beyond the manager or entrepreneur. These causes of business failure

112
can be classified into two broad categories – Micro (internal) and Macro (external). Business can

fail as a result of the micro or macro factors or even a combination of both factors.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 8

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

8.1 Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 8.1, 8.2 and 8.6 )

8.2 Discuss the meaning of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats (SWOT) (SAQ

8.1)

8.3 List the indicators of unmet needs (SAQ 8.2)

8.4 Explain the constraints to exploiting business opportunities (SAQ 8.5)

8.5 List institutional sources of business ideas (SAQ 8.4)

8.6 State Macro and Micro causes of business failure (SAQ 8.3)

8.7 State strategies for business survival (SAQ 8.6)

Key Terms: Strength, weakness, threats, opportunities

8.1 What is SWOT?


SWOT is simply an acronym representing Strength, Weakness, Opportunity, and Threat. An

organisation’s strength is its ability, resources, and the weakness of the competitor or the

opposition. The internal strengths include a company’s core competencies, corporate capabilities

and resources that provide the basis for your strategy, e.g. workforce, decision making process,

flexible board, good working environment, and financial capability. The weakness of an

organisation is its failures, defeats (what other people do better than you), losses and inability to

113
match up with the dynamic situation of the growth of change. This includes the critical parts of

your business you must strengthen or hide from your competitors. Opportunities are possibilities

of what can be done and where effectiveness is possible, the benefits that are likely to accrue from

pursuing your vision. Threats are changes in business environment usually in the PEST forces

which are pitfalls, dangers, variation and exceptions that are present in an environment.

When SWOT is carried out, it prompts actions and responses. It helps balance idealism and

pragmatism so you can obtain a balanced perspective of your internal strengths and weaknesses

and external opportunities and threats in order to develop an effective strategy. Successful

entrepreneurs or businesses build on their strengths, correct their weaknesses and protect against

internal vulnerabilities and external threats. They also keep an eye on their overall business

environment and spot and exploit new opportunities faster than competitors.

Business Strength: Strength is an inherent capacity which an organisation can use to gain strategic

advantage over its competitors. An example of strength is superior research and development skills

which can be used for new product development so that the company gains a competitive

advantage.

Business Weakness: A weakness is an inherent limitation or constraint which creates a strategic

disadvantage. An example of a weakness for a manufacturing company may be over dependence

on a single product line which is potentially risky for a company in times of crisis.

Business Opportunity: An opportunity is a favourable condition in an organisations environment

which enables it to consolidate and strengthen its position. A business opportunity represents a

trend or event that can positively affect the operations and achievement of organisational objectives

under a strategic response. Opportunities are external conditions that are helpful in achieving the

organisational purposes. An example of an opportunity is growing demand for the products or

services that a company provides.

http://www.blogs.triplealearning.com/2010/10/diploma/dp_busman/the-trouble-with-swot/

114
Business Threat: A threat is an unprocurable condition in the organisations environment which

creates a risk for or causes damage to the organisation. A business threat is a trend or event that

would have adverse effects on the operations and achievement of organisational objectives under

a strategic response. Threats can also be external conditions that are harmful to achieving

organisational purposes. An example of a threat is the emergence of strong competitors who are

likely to offer stiff competition to the existing companies in the industry. They come from political,

economic, social and technological forces. For instance, if technology in your line of business is

changing and yours is obsolete, then it is a threat. If government is asking for increase in taxation

and source of income has not increased, it is a threat.

An organization that can take good decision but at slower or bureaucratic pace can
be said to have that as its business strength. Discuss?

Such decision making process could be seen as a weakness because faster decision
making competitors would have taken advantage of the situation even before they
know what is happening. It can only be strength if there are no competitors or the
competitors are even slower.

Fig. 8.1: SWOT Analysis

115
Source: http://blogs.triplealearning.com/2010/10/diploma/dp_busman/the-trouble-with-swot/

An understanding of the external environment in terms of the opportunities and threats and the

internal environment in terms of the strengths and weaknesses is crucial for the growth and

profitability of any organisation.

8.2 Identification of Opportunities


Opportunities can exist for both potential as well as existing businesses. For existing businesses

whether they want to broaden their investment or diversify, there is need to always search the

environment for information and source for business ideas in order to identify where opportunities

exist. For potential entrants, their search is drawn according to their interest. Identifying business

opportunity for big corporations could be the functions of the research and development unit or the

strategic business development unit. For others it could be through personal efforts. What is

important however is that the search is to identify unmet needs?

Needs, according to Abraham Maslow, is classified in hierarchies from basic needs which are

physiological (food, water, warmth, shelter) to security, to esteem needs (psychological or learned

needs) such as status, love or belongingness, social recognition, power, prestige, achievement

which are acquired through socialisation. From each of these level of needs, a gap may exist which

portends an opportunity to be tapped, and it only requires identifying that gap and being able to fill

it.

Case Study 8.1 Recapitalization of Banks

Supposing Central Bank of Nigeria imposes another recapitalization exercise on the Banks say to the tune
of N500 billion and insists that banks unable to attain that will be closed down. However, option of
mergers and acquisition is available, CBN will also be ready to give a bail out to willing banks following
a particular contract terms. Now answer the question below.

116
Where is the opportunity or threat in this case?

The opportunity lies in the fact that any bank whose capital layout is up to the stipulated
amount would not be closed down and can also acquire other banks and get bigger.
However, it will pose a very big threat to banks whose minimum paid up capital is less
than that, and there is no possibility of raising the amount within the stipulated time.

8.2.1 Indicators of Unmet needs

When we identify trends in our environment through the situational analysis described above or

through observations and discovers there is a ‘gap’ or unsatisfied/unmet needs, it becomes an

opportunity to tap in. The indicators of such opportunities as enunciated by Isimoya (2005) are:-

Poor delivery of products/services:- where there are complaints and visible problems

faced by customers, one can see it as an opportunity and come up with better method of

delivering such products/services. E.g. in the past, letters, parcels, etc, were handled by

NIPOST, but the courier companies saw the visible complaints and dissatisfaction in

customers and today have taken over the market from NIPOST.

Dissonance (lack of Agreement in beliefs) with current means of satisfying existing

needs: If people’s expectations are not met in certain products or services, dissatisfaction

sets in. For instance, when it became obvious that our public or government schools were

no longer meeting the expectations of the populace, the private schools came in. Nigerian

Airways with its abysmal service paved way for private airline operators.

Emergent Needs: These are envisaged needs or needs in the early stages of development.

Every need at a point in time was emergent. Tapping into this opportunity has so much to

do with foresight. Your ability to foresee a need to be met in the future, perhaps needs that

117
may arise through the use or availability of a current product. Nigeria for instance has need

for storage/preservation of our fruits and vegetables especially because they are mostly

seasonal produce. This is a gap identified. If any individual or organisation can come up

with a best approach to preserving these foods so as to have them all round the season, the

business will thrive. The individual will have government and farmers support and

patronage. For instance, people foresaw the danger in carrying cash about and came up

with the idea of credit cards, ATM cards, and the on-line real-time banking. Another

emergent need is the scraps of old and used cars littered all over. What can be done with

them? Is there a way they can be recycled so as to still put them into good use? Think about

this.

Technological Changes: The issue of technology is dynamic, we all agree. An innovative

entrepreneur will always be interested in thinking of ways to improve the existing

technology in its line of operation if he/she has the means of doing so, especially if he/she

feels that a particular technology is becoming obsolete or no longer serving its purpose.

This way he may find it as a business opportunity to launch the better technology which

customers or users may prefer to the existing one. For instance, it took an innovative and

ingenious business men to realize that grinding of tomatoes, pepper, pounding of yam, etc.

which hitherto was done manually through the use of mortar could get a better result using

machines (Blender, Poundo machine). A gap existed there because some career women

have little or no time to pound and a machine was just apt.

Envisaged Large Market: When the users of a product are many such that those serving

the market may not be doing that effectively, other business men could go into that market,

since it is large enough to accommodate all. For instance most of the Igbo traders that bring

118
in radio face the northern market knowing that this group of people especially the lower

status like listening to the radio a lot.

Monopoly: Where there is no statutory barrier as to the entry into a particular business, any

interested entrepreneur could go into the line of business, more so if he feels he could make

greater impact, either in service delivery or in the production of the goods or services. The

entrepreneur could also develop a competitive product to create an alternative or allow

customers have choices to that kind of business. NITEL for instance was statutorily created

to provide communication for the nation. No entrepreneur was allowed into the business of

communication until few years past when it became obvious that the issue of

communication needed to be privatized and commercialized. Same is almost applying to

PHCN now as people are calling for private enterprise in the business of power generation.

So where a business is seen as monopolizing the production of a particular product or

services, others may step in to enjoy a share of the market.

Segmentation: Where an entrepreneur identifies that a particular segment or group of a

market is not served due to their peculiar difference, such entrepreneur has seen a gap or

an unmet need and could close in to exploit the opportunity by tailoring his product or

service toward the market if the capacity to do so is provided. For instance, University of

Lagos started its Distance Learning (DLI) programme having discovered that a particular

segment of the society was almost denied education due to the fact that they were unable

to secure admission through the regular means, or didn’t have the opportunity to even seek

education; they felt there should be a second chance for them to live out their dreams.

Several people abound who wants university education but are too busy to come to
class even on a weekend. NUC noticed this and is introducing Open and Distance
Learning System. What do you think NUC is doing?

119
NUC discovered there was a gap and an unmet need and decided to close in on
that by encouraging universities to take advantage of the opportunity presented by
this yearning population.

8.3 Institutionalized sources of business


Even though large organisations use their research and development unit to source for business

ideas, there are institutionalized sources of business idea according to Isimoya (2005). These

include:

i. Universities and Research Institutes

a. These are centres where students and consultants have done a lot of research on new

businesses and the reports have largely been left to waste. Examples are Federal

Institute of Industrial Research Oshodi (FIIRO), Project Development Agency

(PRODA) Enugu, and all other universities and research bodies. These places could

be visited by an entrepreneur to check the possibility of finding a researched work

which will serve as an opportunity to be cashed upon.

ii. Consulting Firms/Market Researchers

iii. Ministry of Science and Technology

iv. Industrial and business publications

a. There are very vital information published by business journals /magazines etc. This

can help a searching mind to identify a business opportunity. For instance, Business

Day, Financial times, etc.

v. Banks

Some banks have their in-house journals which discerning minds can identify opportunities in.

The journal mirrors the society and trend of events in it. For instance, UBA in the 80s

and early 90s had what it called the economic digest which reported mostly economic

activities and businesses financed by the bank.

vii. Family Members and Employee

One’s family members and even employees can also be a good source of information for business

120
opportunities.

8.4 Constraints to the exploitation of business opportunity


1) Economic Factors. These include cost consideration (capital needed, level of

competition in the market, resource availability such as adequate skilled manpower and

suitable material resources, location and the size of the market.

2) Technical factors. Lack of technical know-how to provide such goods and services

that will satisfy customers. From some perspective people will jump at products that

can prevent baldness, loss of sight, death or sickness, but there is no technology to that

effect yet.

3) Knowledge factors. This could be a constraint because the right knowledge to the

opportunity or gap may be missing.

List three constraints to exploitation of business opportunity.

Three constraints to business opportunity exploitation are economic factors, technical


factors, and knowledge factors.

8.5 Business Failure


Several reasons could be responsible for the failure of a business venture. The possible reasons

may be either due to the entrepreneur’s fault, or because of forces beyond the entrepreneur’s

control. These causes have been classified as micro (internal) and macro (external) causes of

business failure. Read on.

8.5.1 Micro Causes of Business Failure (Internal)

This section looks at the failure of business from the entrepreneur’s point of view or as a result of

the fault of the owners.

121
1. Laying more emphasis on product rather than market and marketing

The requirement to identify a market for your idea or the product is more important than the product

itself. You may have a great idea or a product, but if there are no buyers for the product then it

cannot be a success. Smart businessmen and women first identify the market requirement and then

develop products accordingly. For your business idea to succeed you need to first find if there is a

market for your idea by conducting a market test run. Find out if people actually want your product,

and how much they are ready to pay for it.

2. Laying more emphasis on the company image.

To project a high-profile image for the company by hiring expensive office space and a fancy logo

and website will not do much to facilitate in the success of your business. In fact, high overheads,

because of expensive space and website maintenance costs, can drive you out of business very fast.

The golden rule for the success of any business is to keep overheads low, especially at the start up

time. At the start up time, keep the overheads low by reducing expenses. Operate from modest

office space. Prospects cannot see where you are operating from and they do not care, anyway. Try

to invest more on your marketing activities, which are likely to increase your revenue and chances

of success.

3. Getting into Undesirable or Bad Business Partnership.

You should get into business partnership only if you find that your ideas match with the probable

partner, because business partnerships are even more difficult to maintain than marriages. Many

partnerships fail because of lack of communication, proper documentation and deeds. A failed

partnership can lead to bankruptcy and soured relations with the business partner. Avoid

partnerships completely, if you possibly can. But if you must get into a business partnership, make

sure the duties and responsibilities of the partners are detailed right from the start and the

partnership deed along with commercial terms is clearly defined

4. Attempting to have a very complex business model

The simpler the business model, the better it is. In a simple and uncomplicated business model,

122
everybody including your vendors, suppliers, employees, and customers are well aware of their

responsibilities and goals. In a complex model they have to adapt themselves to new roles that they

may not be comfortable with. While devising the business model, follow the rule of "keep it

simple". As the business grows and gets established, you can shift to a more radical or complicated

business model, if required.

5. Attempting to pioneer a new product or industry

Many businesses get into the vicious cycle of trying to pioneer a new product or industry- many a

times the whole exercise can drain you and your business completely, without much success. Very

few and limited entrepreneurs succeed in radically new businesses. Even customers at times are

scared off because of a totally new concept or product; hence chances of success are not assured,

despite all the efforts that you may apply. Try to achieve extraordinary business success by simply

improving business practices of the existing business, rather than trying your hand at pioneering a

new product. Once the business is established, you can try to get into the pioneering new product

cycle.

6. Poor business planning/financial decisions. Not carrying out feasibility studies.

7. Inadequate capital before commencement of business

8. Bad management

9. Cash flow problems: you spend more than you receive

10. Fall in demand for the product

11. Lack of control of costs/rise in cost

12. Over expansion

13. Ineffective sales force

14. Fraud\fraudulent practices/lack of viable work ethics

15. Failure to meet competition

16. Location of business

17. Inadequate number of workers/staff

123
18. Slow season e.g. children’s bags, umbrellas produced

19. Dealing on cheap/substandard products or services

20. Lack of awareness of the business by its target market/environment

21. Not engaging in business promotion/advertisement

22. Corporate maturity: as a firm goes through its normal life cycle and eventually declines.

23. Getting involved in a business lawsuit and bankruptcy. Business lawsuits that are not in your

favour can take away all your assets, including your personal assets like home, property, savings,

etc, and make you and your business bankrupt. Always operate a business under the protection of

a corporation, courtesy of which you get a corporate shield. In this way personal liability to the

business is limited to whatever you choose to put in your business. It is always advisable to hire

the services of a lawyer and an accountant to discuss your personal involvement in the business,

with respect to assets and even the taxation. If carefully planned, you can eliminate almost 100%

of all potential legal threats which could go against your personal assets.

Outline any five micro causes of business failure

Five micro causes of business failure may include laying emphasis on product instead of
market and marketing; attempting to pioneer a new product; poor business planning,
inadequate capital, and location of business.

8.5.2 Macro causes of Business Failure (External)

1) Political instability

2) Lack of infrastructural development


3) Corrupt practices in society especially among technocrats who thwart government
economic policies
4) Low technological know-how. Most businesses can’t fit in into the latest technologies.
5) Limited sources of capital in issue of access to funds and demand for collateral
6) Labour management face off
7) Poor and inadequate funding of the educational system where future leaders in
government are trained
8) Lack of research

124
List any five macro causes of business failure

Five macro causes of business failure are Political instability, Lack of infrastructural
development, Corrupt practices in the society especially among technocrats who thwart
government economic policies, Low technological capacity, Limited sources of capital in
issue of access to funds and demand for collateral.

8.6 Survival for Small Scale Businesses


Small businesses can survive if they:
1. Have adequate capital requirement
2. Have innate qualities
3. Engage in customs-made goods since large firms engage in mass production
4. Subsidiary firms
5. Are innovative and ingenuous
6. Have lower capital investment and operating cost
7. Are exempted from corporation tax
8. Source for raw materials locally
9. Have an effective sales force

Summary of Study Session 8

In this Study Session, you have learnt:


1) the concepts of business opportunity, ideas generation and business threat.

2) the definitions of business opportunity and threat, as well as idea generation in business.
Some of the indicators of business opportunities were highlighted as well as institutional
sources of business ideas. Constraints to business opportunity were also looked into.

3) the micro and macro causes of business failure were examined, factors like poor business
planning/financial decisions, not carrying out feasibility studies, inadequate capital before
commencement of business, bad management, cash flow problems (as you spend more than
you receive) were discovered as micro causes while limited access to credit facilities, lack

125
of infrastructure, political instability may be the macro causes. Survival strategies were also
suggested.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 8


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 8.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.1 and 8.2)


Define Strengths, weakness, opportunities, and threats
SAQ 8.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.3)
What are the indicators of unmet needs? State five indicators
SAQ 8.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.6)
List and explain five micro causes of business failure
SAQ 8.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.5)
Identify three institutionalized sources of business ideas
SAQ 8.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.4)
State three constraints to exploiting business opportunity
SAQ 8.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.7)
Mention four strategies for business survival

Multiple Choice Questions


From the alternatives choose the best option

1. Macro causes of business failure include all except


(a) political instability
(b) lack of infrastucture
(c) Bad management
(d) Corrupt practices

2. “Keep it simple” is a rule followed while


(a) devising the business model
(b) attempting to pioneer a new product
(c) laying more emphasis on company’s image
(d) getting into undesirable business partnership

3. Laying more emphasis on company’s image may lead to high overheads in business. (a)True
(b) False
(c) No idea

126
4. Attempting to pioneer a new product or industry may at times drain the business completely
without much success.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

5. One survival strategy is ..................... before venturing into a business.


(a) not having adequate capital
(b) having adequate capital
(c) having adequate product
(d) not having adequate product

6. ..................... for the product may be one of the macro causes of business failure.
(a) Increase in supply
(b) Increase in demand
(c) Fall in demand
(d) inelastic demand

7. ----------- is an unprocurable condition in the organisations environment which creates a risk


for or causes damage to the organisation.
(a) opportunity
(b) threats
(c) difficulty
(d) all of the above

8. ---------- represents a trend or event that can positively affect the operations and achievement
of organisational objectives under a strategic response
(a) threat
(b) opportunity
(c) friendly environment
(d) none of the above

9. The following except one are constraints to exploiting business opportunity


(a) Economic factors
(b) Knowledge factors
(c) Technical Factors
(d) None of the above

10. Indicators of Unmet needs include all except


a) poor delivery of products/services
b) Dissonance
c) Technology changes
d) perfect competition

11.SWOT acronym stands for


a) Strategy Weaknesses Opportunities and Threat
b) stratified Weaknesses Opportunity and Threats
c) Strengths Weaknesses Opportunities and Threats
d) Strength Weakness Opportunity and Strength

127
Links to OERs
http://www.ebay.com/itm/MANAGEMENT-fifth-edition-Flippo-and-Munsinger
/330106375390
http://www.ukEntrepreneur.com/
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com
http://EzineArticles.com/?expert=Craig_Dawber

References/Suggestions for further reading


Flippo, E. B., Munsinger, G. M. (1982). Management. 5th Edition. Boston. Allyn and
Bacon.
Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An introduction. Lagos.
Concept Pub. Ltd.
Olusemore, G. A. (2006). Essentials of Small Business Management. Lagos; CIBN
Press Ltd.
Pearce, J.A. and Robbinson, R.B. (Jr) (2007). Strategic Management: Formulation,
Implementation and Control. 10th Edition, New York; Mc Graw Hill.

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

128
STUDY SESSION 9:

SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND BUSINESS ETHICS

Introduction

The business system is a subsystem of an organized society. Business is a creation of society. It

helps in the responsibility of achieving societal objectives/expectations. The responsibility of

business traditionally is to produce and distribute goods and services in return for a profit. This

definition is no longer tenable as the increasing size and complexity of societies’ needs make it

narrow. The notion of social responsibility and ethics of business has emerged out of dynamism

(frequent changes) of relationship between business and society, business and its environment, and

business and its participants. Corporate enterprises have grown in size, the level of education has

significantly increased, and people now ask a lot more questions about their rights, their privileges

and their responsibilities. Related to this is the fact that the awareness of the social impact of

business activities on society is enormous, both overtly and covertly, directly, and indirectly.

Every organization is part of an interactive system which has several stakeholders. The most

prominent of them are the managers, owners, employees, consumers, and society at large. The

management of an organization cannot afford to ignore or short-change any of the groups if it

wants to succeed. It must be socially responsible.

Society expects reasonable ethical conduct on the part of business executives as they make

decisions which affect the lives of other people. Ethics emanates from a Greek word “ethika” and

from “ethos”, meaning character, or custom. Ethics is a branch of philosophy that deals with the

morality of human actions. It is a subject that deals with the ‘goodness’ or ‘wrongness’ of human

129
conduct. It is a normative subject hence it is defined differently by societies and groups. Therefore,

what is considered a virtue in one society could be a vice in another society, a case of “one man’s

meat being another man’s poison”. It is about contemporary norms or standards of conduct that

govern the relationships among human beings and their institutions. It is argued that improvements

in ethical conduct have led and will continue to lead to increases in the level of social responsibility

among business firms.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 9

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

9.1 Define and use correctly all the keywords printed in bold (SAQ 9.1, 9.4)

9.2 Define social responsibility (SAQ 9.1)

9.3 Identify the arguments for and against social responsibility (SAQ 9.2)

9.4 List the various stakeholders or interest groups in social responsibility (SAQ 9.7)

9.5 Mention the benefits of social responsibility to the organization (SAQ 9.3)

9.6 Define ethics and state the causes of ethical compromise and influences (SAQ 9.4)

9.7 Describe ethical issues in business and factors encouraging compliance to ethics (SAQ
9.5)
9.8 Explain measures to ensure ethical practices are followed (SAQ 9.6)

Key Terms: Ethics, compliance, social responsibility, business, Honesty and


Fairness, Conflict of Interest, Communications.

9.1 Definition of Social Responsibility


Ferrell, Hirt, and Ferrell (2008) define social responsibility as a business’s obligation to maximize

its positive impact and minimize its negative impact on society. Pearce and Robinson (2007)

describe corporate social responsibility as the idea that business has a duty to serve society in

130
general as well as the financial interests of stockholders. Schermerhorn (2002) defines social

responsibility as an obligation of the organization to act in ways that serve both its own interests

and the interests of its many external stakeholders. Oldroyd in Isimoya (2005) sees it as the

obligation to protect and improve the welfare of society as well as its own interest. Dibb et al in

Isimoya (2005) describes social responsibility as having to do with the impact of the organisation’s

decision on the society. Essentially, social responsibility is an obligation of organisations and

companies to participate in the development and impact positively on the environment in which

they do or operate their business. It is an attempt to pay the society back for the profit they make,

hence the name Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).

These definitions imply that social responsibility fundamentally refer to actions taken by a
business (corporate body) which in some ways or to some extent assist the society to achieve one
or more of its objectives and help people to live better lives. Such actions are considered socially
responsible actions. Corporate Social Responsibility is not backed by compulsion of the law,
therefore companies are at liberty to undertake it or leave it.

Do you think a situation where government through law forces firms to put aside a
setting percentage of their income aside from the tax they pay is an act of
encouraging social responsibility?

No. It is not an act of social responsibility because social responsibility is not


backed by compulsion or law. It is voluntary.

9.1.1 Basic Assumption about Socially Responsible Business Organisation

i. Awareness: Managers of such organisations are aware of the firm’s obligation to solve

some of the problems facing society.

ii. Willingness: There is willingness on the part of the firm to help solve some of these social

problems, even though not all the problems of society can be solved by business

organisations.

iii. Commitment of Resources: Such organisations attempt to make decisions and commit

131
resources of various kinds in some of the following problem areas:

iv. Pollution problems: air, water, solid waste, land, and noise

v. Poverty and discrimination problems: minority groups and women, black capitalism,

urban problems

vi. Consumerism: Product safety, misleading advertising, consumer complaints etc.

vii. Other social problems

Most socially responsible organizations are assumed to have basic characteristics.


Mention them.

They are aware, willing and ready to commit their resources

9.1.2 Is There Really Need For Social Responsibility?

This leads to a very vital question. Should business be socially responsible? We have two schools

of thought. One says, ‘yes’ the other says ‘no’. There are those for and against social responsibility

of businesses. So, there are two sides to the argument.

9.3 Arguments in Favour of Social Responsibility


This argument is championed by Robert F. Hansberger, T.G.P Rogers and others.

1) Business is unavoidably involved in social issues. That business corporations are an entity
of society, allowed by society to exist and if society does not exist, organisations will also not
exist. Thus, when there is a change in societal expectations about business, so should their
actions change. Without society to buy organizations’ products or services, the aims of
production and consequently profitability will be defeated.
2) Corporate businesses have the obligation and resources to help solve some of the problems
facing society. The society as we know includes its customers, owners, employees, creditors,
government, community, and the society at large which business has relationship with. The
firm must attempt to make decisions and commit resources of various kinds in some of the

132
society’s problematic areas for the long run attainment of business goals. According to Peter
F. Drucker, “a healthy business cannot exist in a sick society”.
3) Organisations tap their natural, material, and human resources used for production from
the environment (society), it therefore behaves them to be socially responsible in return.
4) A better society means a better environment for doing business.
5) A favourable image of the organisation in the eyes of the public is of great importance to the
enterprise as socially responsible businesses will ward off future government interventions and
regulations. According to George Champion of Chase National Bank, USA, business must
learn to look upon its social responsibilities as inseparable from its economic function. If it
fails to do so, it leaves a void that will be quickly filled by others – usually by the government.
6) Being socially responsible is a moral and right thing to do since most business activities
create some form of problem for the society e.g. pollution of water, land, etc. And taking up
social actions to ameliorate public outcry is welcomed.

9.1.4 Arguments Against

This is essentially advocated by Milton Friedman and others.

1. Business is an economic institution and the only determinant of organisational

performance is economic values – profit maximisation. To fill a social role in addition to

making profits will eventually use up the capital of business firms thereby endangering the

profit-making motive.

2. The Social responsibility of business is to use its resources and engage in activities

designed to increase its profits. So long as it stays within the game, “competition without

deception or fraud”. For these scholars, profit maximization ensures the efficient use of

society’s resources and entail been responsible.

3. The classic view holds that business acts in a socially responsible manner if it utilizes as

efficiently as possible the resources at its disposal in meeting the goods and services that

society wants at prices consumers were willing to pay. That is, the idea of social

responsibility is incongruent or incompatible with the concept of a free-market economy and

hence a free society.

133
4. As an economic institution, business lacks the ability to pursue social goals because

business is not equipped to handle social matters. Moreover, managers are economically

production-oriented and as such do not have the necessary expertise (social skills) to make

social decisions.

5. It is a subtle socialist idea. That is an indirect way of using political mechanism as opposed

to market mechanisms, as the most appropriate means of allocating scare resources.

6. In a free enterprise system, a manager as an employee has the sole objective of making as

much profit as possible for stockholders. If business becomes socially responsible, it detracts

attention from its responsibilities to stockholders. They are saying in essence that business

managers are not elected; they are therefore not directly accountable to the people, but to the

stockholder.

7. Business managers already have power. If they are allowed the freedom to use
organisational resources for the good of the society, rather than strictly upholding the interest
of the owners, such managers are being conferred with arbitrary and dangerous powers which
they may misuse.
8. Since enterprises pay taxes to the government, it would be exploitative to expect the same
organisation to also use part of their earnings in a socially responsible manner. Government
can only increase taxation on profit and let organisations focus on their major duty of being
responsible to their owners, thus allowing government to tackle social development
programmes.
9. Being socially responsible is an attempt to encourage a socially irresponsible government to
shirk its responsibility.
10. No matter how much is done in terms of social responsibility, many organisations will still
have problems with their locality. It is better not to start at all, as the request and desire for
more is endless and would further increase the misunderstanding between business enterprises
and the local countries. Society should appreciate that government is solely responsible for
their development and business enterprise.

134
Do you think social responsibility is necessary? If yes, give two reasons. If not
give two reasons also.

Yes, it is necessary because organisations tap their natural, material, and human
resources from the society so they should be responsible. Again, a better and
healthy society means a better environment for doing business. No. It is not
necessary because business organisations pay tax to government who should use
that for developmental purposes, it is therefore exploitative to ask them to be
socially responsible. Secondly, being socially responsible is an indirect way of
encouraging government to be socially irresponsible

9.1.5 Factors Responsible for Consideration of Social Responsibilities by business

i. Increased Awareness/Public opinion: There is increased awareness and people’s

opinion has changed about the role of business. The society is willing to ask a lot more

questions about the impact of business organisation on their lives.

ii. The presence of the labour movement


iii. The development of moral values and social standards applicable to businessmen.
iv. Recognition of human factors (employees) contributing to the long term interests of
business.
v. The development of a professional managerial class with different motive and point of
view due to the separation of ownership from management. Business managers are also
concerned citizens.

Why do you think businesses consider being socially responsible? Give two
reasons.

The two reasons are that the society has increased knowledge about business
activities and are asking a lot more questions; and secondly the presence of labour
movement.

135
9.16 Interest Groups in Social Responsibility

These are the specific public that may lay claim on returns from the business - Stakeholders of a

business. The stakeholders are groups of persons who have committed something to a business

enterprise and therefore have expectations from it. It may also be a person or persons who affect

or can be affected by the company actions. They are:

i. Consumers/Customers: To these set of group, goods and services must be provided at

fair prices. Unethical and unfair trade practices must be avoided as consumers have

protective legislation and consumer movements termed consumerism. Where required,

after-sales services should be provided. Adequate information concerning essential

features of a product or service should be made known to consumers. Business must

avoid planned product obsolescence or pushing out expired goods to the consumers.

Products and services must always be provided according to consumers’ wants and

demands. Providing for consumer product protection through simple but adequate

labelling/instruction especially where illiterates are predominant. Not making deceptive

and exaggerated claims of products or services.

ii. Employees: This pertains to wages and salaries, working condition, relationship between

superiors and subordinates, the work environment, as well as general employee welfare.

For instance carrying the union along in matters concerning staff welfare, giving workers

equal opportunities in hiring, pay and promotion, providing adequate opportunity for

management employee communication, providing adequate training and development

opportunity.

iii. Shareholders (Owners): It is the obligation of companies to ensure a fair return on

investment in terms of profit, dividend declaration, bonus, etc. In essence, the declaration

of adequate profit on capital invested ensures the survival of the company and the delivery

of the desired reward on shareholders’ risk (capital). Again, it must also ensure equitable

and fair treatment of different classes of shareholders in the business, and ensure the safety

136
of the capital invested. Owners must be furnished with relevant and timely information

relating to the business present and proposed activities.

iv. Government: To the government, business enterprise must be law abiding, pay their taxes

and other dues fully and regularly, honestly and when due. It should provide accurate

statistical data to government for planning and decision making. It must not attempt to hold

back information. Get involved in research and development. Support and contribute

toward the developmental programmes of the government. Support government policies

and cause.

v. Community: Organizations owe the community the duty of ensuring the environment is

protected and not polluted, conserving the natural resources and not helping in the

extinction of vulnerable animals or materials. Employing the socially handicapped or

physically challenged and the underprivileged or deprived persons. Helping in rural

development, provision of immediate relief to victims of disasters and natural calamities.

In essence, helping in contributing towards the better life of the people in the community

through the provision of essential economic amenities such as employment, scholarships,

recreational facilities, infrastructures like good road, water, electricity, health

facilities/drugs, schools, etc. They should also donate equipments and funds to hospitals,

schools, craft villages, orphanages, endow chairs to the universities, create and maintain

good relationship within the general and local area of operation. It is also necessary for

businesses to help in the revival of the culture and heritage of the community where they

operate.

vi. Suppliers: These stakeholders must be paid promptly and in accordance with the terms of

contract. A proper notice of specification and requirement must be given to avoid distortion.

vii. Creditors: The creditors are those the business owes; these set of people need to be paid

promptly and according to the agreed terms so as to enable the business enjoy credit

benefits in future.

137
In conclusion, the objective of a business firm is no longer single (profit) but multiple in nature.
This is because the aforementioned interest groups would have to be taken care of. Peter F. Drucker
once said “To manage a business is to balance a variety of needs and goals”, and the company’s
management is usually at the centre to equitably distribute the rewards or resources among each of
the interest groups.

Identify any five interest groups in social responsibility

Five interest groups are the employees, shareholders, customers, government, and
Suppliers.

9.1.7 Benefits of Social Responsibility to the Organisation

The following benefits are likely to accrue to organizations practising social responsibility.

1) A better awareness of the organisation is created

2) Public opinion sways in favour of such organisation

3) There is increase in profit as more customers/public patronizes the organization

4) The organization is likely to attract socially conscious investors.

9.2 Business Ethics

9.2.1 Definition of Ethics

Pearce and Robinson (2007) refer to ethics as the moral principles that reflect society’s beliefs

about the actions of an individual or a group that are right and wrong. Ethics are principles or

standards of human conduct, sometimes called morals (Latin ‘mores’ ‘customs’), and by extension

the study of such principles is sometimes called moral philosophy. Longmans Dictionary of

Contemporary English defines Ethics as “Moral rules or principles of behaviour for deciding what

is right or wrong”. Ethics is concerned with the questions of right or wrong. For instance, ethical

questions could be “Is this act right”? “Is this act wrong”? Again, it determines the standards of

138
good and bad.

However, the values of one individual or group, or society may be at odds with the values of

another individual, group, or society. Ethical standards do not reflect a universally accepted code,

but rather the product of a process of defining and clarifying the nature and content of human

interaction.

9.2.2 Ethics and the Various Aspects of Human Life

Every profession specifies some code of ethics for their members. Once you become a member

you are bound to obey or adhere, otherwise you will be sanctioned. There are certain things which

lawyers, medical doctors or accountants cannot do while practising their professions. Usually, most

professional bodies forbid their members from advertising their services. It is believed that the

quality of the service they render should advertise them.

In the same vein, every organisation whether public or private has a code of ethics guiding them.

The codes may state how a member should conduct himself in the discharge of his official duty,

the do’s and don’ts of the organization and what they probably consider as the culture of the

organisation that must be adhered to by every member of the organisation. Conformity or

obedience to such codes is compulsory within the period the official is still in employment of the

organisation.

9.2.3 State of Ethical Standards in Nigeria

The norm in Nigeria in the past before 1999 had been that of a businessman or woman

compromising his ethical standards before getting things done. Corruption was common as it

seemed that the only way to succeed in business is the demonstration of a good understanding of

the language of bribery. Those in charge of awarding contracts in both the government and private

sectors demand gratification from contractors before doing their jobs (Olusemore, 2006). The bank

manager demands a certain percentage of money from you before granting your request for a bank

loan. For instance, an official of the defunct National Electric Power Authority (NEPA) expects

139
you to bribe him before fixing a damaged electric line. The police and customs officers mount

unauthorized roadblocks to extort money from motorists. It looked then like we had lost our sense

of value and justice. However, Obasanjo’s government, especially since 2003 staged a headlong

war against corruption and this is beginning to bring some measure of sanity into the entire system

(Olusemore, 2006). Today, we cannot claim corruption has been totally eradicated in Nigeria, but

within the private sector to an extent it is reduced especially with the shakeup in the financial

industry. Same cannot be said of the public sector operation even though from government

perspective they have what they call “due process” in place for the awarding of contracts and sale

of public goods; but this is yet to yield visible fruits more so as actions from government quarters

and even social comments both in the electronic and print media, have it that high level of

corruption is still evident within government and the public sector. However, recent happenings

and fall outs of the premium motor spirit (petrol) subsidy removal point to the fact that in not too

distant a time, corruption would be reduced to the barest minimum while ethical conducts are

stepped up because the society is asking lot more questions.

How would you explain the term “ethics"

Ethics are the principles or standards guiding human conduct. They are moral
rules which determine the right or wrong of a behavior.

9.2.4 Factors Encouraging Compliance to Ethics

Several reasons or factors could be adduced as to why ethical norms are followed by members of

a professional body or organizations as they perform their duties. These may be as a result of:

i. Their personal value system

ii. Religious beliefs

iii. The law

iv. Public opinion

140
v. Fear of punishment

The pressure from the sources above, among others, compel organization’s members to confine

their ethical conduct within acceptable or tolerable organizational standards.

9.2.5 Causes of Ethical Compromise and Influences

There are several reasons why businesspeople compromise the value system. A businessman or

woman who always sees himself as the industry leader may want to do everything possible to

preserve the cherished position (Olusemore, 2006). That is to say, the pressure of competition often

leads people to engage in unethical practices. It may also mean that the person’s company is in bad

shape, and he wants to keep it going.

Secondly, if people in the past had broken similar ethical standards and were not punished by law,

other people may likely go into it since nothing will happen. That is, if the judicial process is weak

and people can get away with any type of crime committed, then many more will be encouraged

to go into unethical practices.

Again, as the popular saying goes, “one man’s meat is another’s poison”; what is considered a vice

in one setting may be a value in another; and so people with wrong sense of value and who engage

in unethical practice do not see certain action as a vice. Olusemore (2006), states that the wish to

succeed in a society that does not recognize hard work as a means of success can make some

businessmen to be unethical in their business behaviour.

9.2.6 Ethical Issues in Business

Olusemore (2006) identified some ethical issues in business thus.

Conflict of Interest: In this context a worker allows his or her personal interest to override the

official obligation.

Honesty and Fairness: Where dishonesty and inequity become the norm in a business organisation

as they deal with the stakeholders.

141
Communications: Ethics demand that there should not be deceit or exaggerated claims in any

contact or communication with the public; instead, vital facts that can assist third parties to take

decisions should be disclosed.

Respect in the Workplace: Business ethics emphasizes the establishment of a work environment

in which all individuals are treated with respect and dignity. All forms of discriminatory practices

e.g. sexual harassment should be avoided. Employees on their own should treat one another with

respect.

Safety Policy: In an ethical organisation, safety of the workers and customers is paramount. The

company should cultivate safety practices and put in place measures of protection and insurance

policy.

Fair dealing: Business operators should not take undue advantage or exert undue influence on

people through manipulation, concealment, abuse of privilege or confidential information,

misrepresentation of material facts, fraudulent behaviour or any other unfair dealing practice.

Financial Statement Integrity: Business ethics states that a company should follow strict

accounting principles and standards to report financial information accurately and completely.

There should be internal checks to ensure that accounting information complies with standard

regulations and laws.

Compliance with the law: Businesses should comply with appropriate commercial laws of the

land such as money laundering act; exchange control regulations, etc.

There are ethical issues in business. State three

Three ethical issues in business are financial statement integrity, safety policy, and
fair dealing

Other manifestations of unethical practices include:


i. Falsification of documents

142
ii. Inflation of contracts
iii. Receiving payments for goods and materials not delivered or contracts not executed
iv. Forgery of payment vouchers and cheques with the assistance of some staff
v. Abuse of tendering procedure
vi. Printing of government security documents illegally and using same for
perpetration of fraud
vii. Selling of materials illegally withdrawn from government stores
viii. Offering gratification to public officers in order to secure a benefit
ix. Conniving with government officials by executing contracts in a shoddy manner to
reduce cost
x. Abandonment of contract after collecting payment.

9.2.7 Measures to Ensure Ethical Practices Are Followed

Flippo and Munsinger (1982) state that if good ethical practice must be maintained in an

organization, management must ensure that:

a) The Code of ethics is written and not oral. This code should specify what is adduced to be

right or wrong within the organization.

b) Information relating to ethical practice is not centred only on cost and profit

c) The establishment of specific job positions responsible for enforcing the ethical codes of

their organization.

Top management act as strong role models for lower-level personnel

Summary of Study Session 9

In this Study session, you have learnt:


1) the various definitions of social responsibility as well as the basic assumption about socially
responsible business organizations.

143
2) the arguments for and against social responsibility as posited by the different scholars
championing them and identified interest groups in social responsibility and what the
organization owes them.

3) The reason why organizations may likely consider socially responsible actions was also
examined as well as benefits of social responsibility to practicing companies. In this session
the definition of business ethics was given,

4) the state of ethical standards in Nigeria was described, and factors encouraging compliance
to ethics was listed.

5) The causes of ethical compromise and influence was identified while ethical issues in
business and measures to ensure ethical practices are followed in the organizations were
explained.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 9


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 9.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.1, 9.2 )


In two sentences define social responsibility
SAQ 9.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.3)
Compare the arguments for and against social responsibility
SAQ 9.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.5)
State the benefits accruing to a socially responsible organisation
SAQ 9.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.6)
Define ethics and state at least three causes of ethical compromise and influence
SAQ 9.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.7)
Identify four ethical issues in business and two factors encouraging compliance to ethics
SAQ 9.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.8)
Describe measures to ensure ethical practices are followed in the organisation
SAQ 9.7 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.4)
List at least five stakeholders or interest groups in Social Responsibility

144
Multiple Choice Questions
From the options choose the best suited for each question.

1. Most of the socially responsible organisations are:


(a) Aware, Willing and Committed
(b) Unaware, willing, and committed
(c) Aware, lack commitment and willing
(d) unwilling, unaware, and uncommitted

2. According to Peter Drucker, to manage a business is to


(a) balance a variety of needs and goals
(b) make profit only
(c) be socially responsible only
(d) to produce product or service only

3. The argument against social responsibility was propounded by:


(a) Milton Friedman and others
(b) Robert F. Hansberger and Milton Friedman
(c) T.G.P Rogers and Robert F. Hansberger
(d) None of the above.

4. Social responsibility include all except


(a) providing social amenties to the community
(b) creating a healthy environment
(c) sponsorship of sporting events
(d) non payment of taxes to government

5. Interest groups in social reponsibility include all except


(a) Consumes/customer
(b) Employees
(c) State governors
(d) Community

6. ................ states that company should follow strict accounting principles and standards to
report financial information accurately and completely.
(a) Financial Statement Integrity
(b) Respect in the workplace
(c) Safety Policy
(d) Fair dealing
(e) Compliance with the law

7. Society expects .............................. on the part of business executives as they make decision
which affects the lives of other people.
(a) High ethical standard
(b) Low ethical standard
(c) high numerical knowledge
(d) high management skills

8. .............. principles or standards of human conduct, sometimes called morals (Latin


‘mores’ ‘customs’) and by extension the study of such principles, sometimes called moral
philosophy

145
(a) Ethics
(b) Rights
(c) Justice
(d) ethics and justice
9. Top management act as strong role models for lower level personnel
(a) True
(b) False
(c) Not sure
10. The pressure of competition often leads people to engage in
(a) unethical practices
(b) Ethical practices
(c) social reponsibility
(d) high quality product

Links to OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References and Suggestions for further Reading


Flippo, E. B. and Munsinger, G. M. (1982). Management. 5th Edition. Boston. Allyn and
Bacon.http://www.ebay.com/itm/MANAGEMENT-fifth-edition-Flippo-and-
Munsinger-/330106375390
Isimoya, A. O. (2005). Nigerian Business Environment: An introduction. Lagos;
Concept Pub. Ltd.
Pearce, J.A. and Robbinson, R.B. (2007). Strategic Management: Formulation,
Implementation and Control. 10th Edition, New York; Mc Graw Hill.
Schermerhorn, J. R. (2002). Management. 7th Ed. New York. John Wiley & Sons Inc.

146
Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

147
STUDY SESSION 10:

GOVERNMENT ROLE AND ECONOMIC POLICIES

Introduction

Government has the constitutional duty of managing the economy and ensuring the full

employment of its citizens and the maximum utilization of all productive factors, capacities, and

platforms in the economy. Thus, government is expected to put in place a sound macroeconomic

policy framework and introduce well thought-out economic policies and development blueprints

and institute business and investor friendly business policies to drive the development of the

economy. The Nigerian government has over the years issued decrees and policies which had some

measures of success. Some of those decrees and their various schedules will be discussed in this

study session.

In the recent times, one issue that has generated a lot of argument is whether government should

have any direct involvement in running business in Nigeria. While some argue that government

has no business in business, some others are saying government should be involved because of the

peculiarity of the environment. Those who are saying government should not have any direct

involvement in business based their argument on the fact that all public corporations established

and run by government in the past have failed to meet the expectations of both the government and

the people. Examples of such are Nigerian Telecommunication (NITEL), Nigerian Railway

Corporation, National Shipping Line, Nigerian Airways, and Power Holding Company of Nigeria

(PHCN).

It is important however to point out that in every nation, no matter what the form of the government,

the type of economic system, who controls the government, or how rich or poor the country is,

148
these basic economic questions must be answered. They are: (i) What and how much will be

produced? This is usually within the available scarce resources. (ii) How will it be produced? A

decision must be taken either to use more labour (labour intensive) and less capital, or vice versa.

(iii) For whom will it be produced? A mechanism must exist that distributes finished products to

the ultimate consumers and (iv) At what price? The ultimate aim of any business is to make profit.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 10


After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:
10.1Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 10.1, 10.3,10.6, 10.7 and
10.8)
10.2Explain the regulatory and facilitating roles of government in business (SAQ 10.1)
10.3Give reasons for government control of business (SAQ 10.2)
10.4State the objectives of the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree (SAQ 10.3)
10.5List the benefits of the NEPD (SAQ 10.4)
10.6Describe the various schedules of the decrees (SAQ 10.5)
10.7Discuss Structural Adjustment Programme (SAP) (SAQ 10.6)
10.8Explain the commercilization and privatization policies (SAQ 10.7 and 10.8)

Key Terms: Capitalism, Socialism, Communism, Mixed Economy, Statutes,


Administrative Agency, Commercialization, Privatization

10.1 Economic Systems


One way to define economic systems is to classify them according to whether they are Market

Systems or Command Systems. In a market system, individuals own the factors of production and

individually decide how to use them. In contrast, a command system is one in which decision

making is centralized. In a command system, the government controls the factors of production

and makes all decisions about their use and about the consumption of output.

149
In a market system, the interaction of supply and demand for each good determines what and how

much to produce. For example, if the highest price consumers are willing to pay is less than the

lowest cost at which a good can be produced, output will be zero. In addition, the efficient use of

scarce inputs determines how much output will be produced. In a market economy, individuals

make the choice about what is purchased; however, the ability to pay, as well as the consumer’s

willingness to purchase the good or service, determine that choice.

On the one hand, in a command system the central planners determine what and how much will be

produced by first forecasting an optimal level of consumption for a future period and then

specifically allocating resources projected to be sufficient to support that level of production. The

central planner also determines how production will take place and for whom the product is

produced.

Critics, however, commonly argue that in market system the rich tend to be richer while the poor

end to be poorer. The system also leads to selfish behaviour rather than socially desirable outcomes.

In the case of command economy, critics commonly argue that because planned economies cannot

effectively process as much relevant information as a market does, it cannot coordinate economic

activity or satisfy consumers’ demand as well as market forces do.

Capitalism: Under a capitalist economic system, individuals own all resources, both human and

non-human. Governments intervene only minimally in the operation of markets, primarily to

protect the private-property rights of individuals. The demand of consumers combined with the

supply of producers determines what and how much will be produced. Thus, individuals decide

how, what and for whom to produce and at what price.eg Canada, USA and Western Europe.

Socialism: Under a socialist economic system, individuals own their own human capital, and the

government owns most other non-human resources, i.e. most of the major factors of production are

owned by the state. It is a form of command economy. Economic decisions about what and how

much, how and for whom are all made by the state through its central planning agencies.

Communism: Under this system, all resources, both human and non-human are owned by the

150
state. The government takes on a central planning role directing both production and consumption

in a socially desirable manner. e.g former Soviet Union and East Germany.

Mixed Economy: is a system where there is a blend of some elements of both market and

command economies in answering the three fundamental economic questions.

10.1.1 The Role of Government in Business

It is visible that the government of Nigeria plays a significant role in business at least in the

current dispensation. The government’s role can be seen from two angles which are regulatory

and facilitating.

(a) The regulatory role of Government is carried out through the agencies set up by the

government. These agencies exist at the Federal and State levels and they have responsibility

over the legislation for different sectors of the economy. Examples are;

i. Corporate Affairs Commission – regulates and supervises the formation, incorporation,

management and winding up of companies in Nigeria.

ii. Economic and Financial Crime Commission (EFCC) – set up to handle financial crime in

the country.

iii. Security and Exchange Commission (SEC) – Stores information on all publicly traded
companies. This data provides earnings data and annual reports on public companies.

iv. National Broadcasting Commission (NBC) – set up to regulate the activities of

broadcasting organizations in Nigeria.

If a government official or an individual loots the state’s treasury what arm of


government agency is expected to carry out this regulatory role?

The Economic and Financial Crimes Commission (EFCC) is the arm of


government agency expected to address this issue.

The facilitating roles of government are meant to provide favorable business environment which

151
will be attractive to investors. This is also called the Promotional role. Some of the ways the

roles are carried out are:

i. Provide tax and custom duties incentive to business institutions to encourage them to

develop and compete favourably with their foreign counterpart.

ii. Promote free competition in the economy

iii. Put in place laws that bring stability into the economy especially the financial sector as
done recently by the central bank of Nigeria.

10.1.2 Why do Governments Regulate/Control Business?

Governments regulate and control business to:

i. Maintain free competition

ii. Protect public health and safety i.e. the welfare of the people.

iii. Ensure adequate service at reasonable rates by businesses deemed essential to the public

welfare

iv. Raise revenue through collection of taxes

v. Protect infant industries against dumping

vi. Conserve the nations’ resources such as minerals and wildlife.

What are the reasons why government regulate business? State at least two.

Government regulates businesses so as protect infant industries and ensure adequate


service at reasonable rate to the public.

10.1.3 Methods of Control

There are various methods of control including:

i. Statutes: A formal written enactment of a legislative authority that governs a local

government, state, or country. It commands or prohibits kinds of activity within a specific

152
geographical area. Before it becomes a law, it must have been passed by a parliament,

council, state assembly, or national assembly. Penalty for breaking the law is also stated

in the statutes.

ii. Charter: is the grant of authority or rights, stating that the granter formally recognizes

the prerogative of the recipient to exercise the right specified. However, the granter must

retain superiority and the recipient admits a limited status within the relationship.

iii. Administrative Agency: There are specialized agencies such as NAFDAC and BON to

control types of economic activity. The agencies set standards of operations, grant

licenses to operate and supervise operation in general.

• NAFDAC has ordered that every producer of sachet water must have a NAFDAC number

other it will be closed. What method of control is this?

• This is known as Administrative Agency method of control

10. 2 Nigeria Enterprises Promotion Decree (NEPD)


The Nigeria enterprises promotion decree popularly known as the indigenization decree was

promulgated in 1972 but has since been amended many times. The overall aim of the decree was

to give Nigerians a sense of belonging and control over largely the commercial sector and the small

and medium scale sector of the economy, where initial capital requirement and required technical

and managerial skills were within the reach of Nigerians.

The decree initially had two schedules, but this was increased to three schedules in the 1977

amendment to expand the scope of Nigerians in the economy even further.

The details of the three schedules are listed below, as contained in the 1977 amendment:

Schedule One: The enterprises in this schedule were to be exclusively reserved for Nigerian

citizens and associations, provided the capitalization was less than N20 million. Foreigners were

free to invest in these enterprises provided their investment was more than N20 million. Some of

153
the items in schedule 1 are:

• Advertising

• Public relation business

• Assembling of radios, television

• Bottling alcoholic drinks

• Baking cake and bread etc

Schedule Two: The enterprises listed in this schedule are those in which Nigerians were expected

to have a majority ownership of at least 60 per cent. These include:

• Banking (commercial banks merchants banks and development banks)

• Basic iron and steel manufacturing

• Beer brewing

• Clearing and forwarding agencies

Schedule Three: This comprises enterprises in which Nigerians were expected to have a minimum

of forty per cent ownership. These are:

• Distilling and blending of spirits such as ethyl alcohol, whiskey, brandy, etc

• Fertilizer production

• Manufacturing of basic industrial chemicals

• Manufacturing of tobacco

Although the intention of those who promulgated the decree was patriotic and noble, there were

notable pitfalls in its implementation, which included the following:

1. The new social challenge of creating a class off nouveau riche at the expense of the larger

populace.

2. Poor access to funds by interested Nigerian entrepreneurs.

3. Dearth of trained manpower, managerial skills, and technical know-how to run the

enterprises

154
To address these shortcomings the government took necessary action by putting in place the

following measures:

 The establishment of the Nigerian Bank for Commerce and Industry (NBCI) to provide

loans to small and medium sized enterprises.

 The Nigeria Enterprises Promotion Board was established to implement the decree and

achieve the people’s aspiration as far as the decree was concerned.

 The Nigerian Industrial Development Bank (NIDB) was established to handle the

financing of larger ticket industrial projects.

 The Federal Government also established the Council for Management Education and

Training to address the challenge of the paucity of managerial know how and skills

10.2.1 Objectives of Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree

The following were the objectives for which the indigenization decree was instituted:

1. To create more employment for Nigerians.

2. To allow Nigerians have a larger say over the running of the economy.

3. To obviate foreign undue dominance and safeguard the best interests of the Nigerian

economy.

4. To create greater opportunities for training indigenous personnel in the art of

management.

5. To maximize local retention of profits.

10.2.2 Benefits of the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree

1. More employment opportunities have been created for Nigerians in various levels.

2. Nigerians now have a greater stake and thereby better securing the nation’s economic

interests.

3. There has been increased local retention of profit.

4. A pool of indigenous personnel with better technical and management skills have

155
emerged.

10.2.3 A Revised Economic Climate

With the benefit of hindsight, it is reasonable to say that the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree

was ill-conceived and probably did more harm than good to the best interests of the Nigerian

economy. It is safe to assume that a civilian democratic regime could never have enacted such a

law, which ended up driving away and dispossessing foreign investors of investments, businesses,

and assets they have spent many years acquiring and nurturing, thereby sending the wrong signal

to the international business community that foreign investment was not welcome in Nigeria.

Nigeria could have achieved the same objective by encouraging Nigerian entrepreneurs to learn

and operate their businesses alongside their foreign counterparts, with adequate financial and

technical support and training from government and government institutions set up for that

purpose.

It is heartwarming to note that Nigeria has retraced its step in its attitude to foreign investors and

Nigeria now has one of the most foreign investment friendly business environments in Africa and

the world, whereby foreigners are allowed to invest in any sector and repatriate 100 per cent profit

if they so desire.

• What is expected of a foreigner who wants to take advantage of Schedule I as contained

in the 1977 amendment of the NEPD.

• Schedule I was an exclusive reserve for Nigerians. However, foreigners who want to take

advantage of it must be ready to invest more than N20 million in the enterprise.

10.3 Structural Adjustment Programme


The Structural Adjustment Programme (SAP) was introduced by the General Ibrahim Babaginda

regime on July 1, 1986, in a bold move to squarely address the structural basis of the economic

impasse that had for some years faced Nigeria and which seemed to defy all solutions hitherto

156
employed to deal with it. Though the programme officially terminated in June 1988, its

implementation in fact continued throughout the life of the regime to 1993.

Some of the structural imbalances that informed the introduction of the Structural Adjustment

Programme included the following:

• Poor foreign exchange earnings due to poor price of crude oil

• An overvalued currency and an import dependent economy

• High levels of subsidies

• Bloated government expenditure/high budget deficits

• Poor agricultural prices

Measures taken to address the structural imbalances included the following:

• Depreciation of the naira

• Attempt to reduce budget deficits/demand management.

• Removal/reduction of subsidies

• Abolition of commodity boards and increase in agricultural products prices

The consequences of SAP in Nigeria included collapse of local import-substitution industries, high

rate of unemployment, higher costs of living and generalized hardship. In the national debate that

ensued for nearly a year before the introduction of the Structural Adjustment Programme,

Nigerians rejected both the devaluation of the naira and the taking of an International Monetary

Fund (IMF) loan. However, although the SAP programme was drafted by Nigerian technocrats,

it was inspired by the IMF-World Bank structural adjustment paradigm or theoretical construct or

framework. In terms of economic policy prescriptions, Nigeria really had very limited policy

options. So, in the final analysis, Nigeria unavoidably hoisted on itself a home-grown IMF

structural adjustment programme, without the benefit of an IMF loan and technical support

programme. The Structural Adjustment Programme was perhaps the most controversial economic

policy framework Nigeria has ever adopted and understandably so. The effect of SAP especially

157
on vulnerable groups like workers, women and children was extensive and devastating. A large

number of manufacturing firms closed down and large number of people were thrown into the

labour market. With the sharp depreciation of the naira, raw materials became very expensive,

leading to some level of backward integration which benefited the economy. But on the whole,

high cost of imported raw materials led to the collapse of the manufacturing sector as well as

imported inflation. The reduction of subsidies on petroleum products and the outright removal of

subsidies on some other items, though necessary to curtail government spending, further added to

the hardship of the vulnerable groups in the society. On the contrary, policy makers who initiated

SAP did not share in the burden or hardship of structural adjustment, hence the social inequity.

They lived in government houses, drove in government-fuelled vehicles and were generally

shielded from the adverse effects of SAP.

Overall, the political risks of SAP were borne by national governments. The International

Monetary Fund, which prescribed and inspired these programmes, was far-removed from the arena

of the political turmoil engendered by the hard pills of SAP. This was one of the draw-backs of

SAP, as far as its implementation was concerned.

However, the SAP remains basically a sound and brilliant economic blue-print for economic

adjustment and recovery. Furthermore, the tale has not always been one of woe. Ghana, our next-

door neighbor, successfully implemented its SAP programme. The failure of SAP in Nigeria was

a result of the great opposition to it, which gave it a little chance of success, and even more

importantly, its poor implementation by the General Ibrahim Babangida regime, which was part of

the reason it was greatly opposed.

The SAP was not just introduced for the fun of it. Some imbalances were identified.

Mention any two of such imbalances

158
Some of the imbalances were (i) overvalued currency and import dependent
economy, and (ii) bloated government expenditure/high budget deficits

10.4 Commercialization
Commercialization is the introduction of performance or efficiency-based principles in the running

of public or state-owned enterprises in a way that makes their operation self-sustaining and better

able to achieve the objectives for which they were established, without constituting a drain on the

public treasury. Commercialization requires state-owned enterprises to mimic private sector

enterprises in the way they undertake their operations and render service to their customers or

clients, thereby enhancing their value and justifying the huge amount of tax payers’ money used

to set them up. When government commercializes any of its enterprises, it retains full ownership

of the assets of the enterprise, the primary objective being to enhance the efficiency of the

enterprise and make it more effective in delivering on the mandate for which it was set up. This is

as contrasted with privatization, when government sells off the assets of the company or transfers

its equity interests in the company to private investors. As owners of a commercialized state-owned

enterprise, government still appoints all the members of the board of directors and the executive

management of the enterprise.

The following are the requirements for the successful commercialization of a public enterprise:

• The reduction or elimination of subvention to the enterprise

• Reduction to the barest minimum or elimination of political interference by the supervising

government ministry in the day to day running of the enterprise.

• Appointment of a reputable board of directors and commitment to sound corporate

governance principles.

• The appointment of a competent management team

• Principle self-accounting, financially autonomous and self-funding

159
• Increases in the prices of goods and services so as to enable it cover its costs and make a

reasonable surplus

• Better customer-oriented approach in the rendering of services and a competitive spirit.

10.4.1 Objectives of Commercialization

The objectives of commercialization include:

• Improved efficiency or reduction of waste, thereby ensuring that organizational resources,

i.e., man, materials, machines, and money are utilized in the most judicious manner to

achieve optimal results, with minimal use of time. It also requires that managers manage

well and are adept in motivating their staff and getting the required results through them in

a congenial working environment, with a healthy working relationship among and between

managers and employees.

• Budgetary savings and the payment of net surpluses into government treasury. First

government saves money which can be put to other use. Thus, if commercialization

succeeds, the enterprise at the end of the financial year would be able to generate a

reasonable surplus which is paid into government coffers, thereby justifying the huge initial

investment by government and also expanding the budgetary base of government and

enhancing its ability to provide social services to the people.

10.4.2 Assessment of Commercialization Programmes in Nigeria

Commercialization of government enterprises in Nigeria has been an abysmal failure. Using

government utility companies like the erstwhile National Electric Power Authority (NEPA) and

Nigerian Telecommunications Limited (NITEL) as cases in point, the introduction of

commercialization into these enterprises only resulted in higher tariffs and their abilities to pay

their employees better salaries, without a commensurate improvement in the quality of services

160
rendered by them. Reasons for the continued poor performance of these state-owned enterprises

were continued interference in day to day operations by supervising ministries, the patronage

system, politically compromised employment practices, the absence of a merit driven human

resource policies and practices, rent-seeking behaviour and a corruption-ridden system.

In conclusion, though government policy on commercialization may be laudable, politicians and

supervising ministries lacked the required political will to enable the commercialization process to

succeed.

Power Holding Company of Nigeria (PHCN) as a state-owned enterprise is expected by

government to make profit and sustain itself like the private sectors do. How would you

explain this action of government?

What government has done is barely commercialize PHCN. This is done in order to

introduce efficiency based principles in the running of the enterprise.

10.5 Privatization
Privatization is the selling of government owned economic assets to private investors or the

transfer by government of its equity interests in state-owned enterprises or commercial enterprises

to private investors by way of direct sale. Privatization could also take the form of handing over or

bringing state-owned economic assets under the direct control and operation of private

entrepreneurs for usually a considerable period of time, under a concessioning arrangement.

Nigeria has recorded considerable experience in privatization in the last three decades or so under

the Bureau of Public Enterprises (formerly Technical Committee on Privatization and

Commercialization). At the inception of the privatization and commercialization programme in the

late 1980s, under TCPC, the emphasis was initially on commercialization, because government

then did not have the political will to privatize. Besides, Nigeria was realistically not ready for

161
privatization for two reasons. First the people were not willing to let go of public enterprises which

they saw as national heritage; and secondly, the required diffusion of skills necessary for successful

privatization transactions were yet not resident in Nigeria. To compound this was the extensive

vested interest in maintaining status – there were just too many people benefiting from government

ownership of huge public enterprises who did not want to let go. These included politicians, civil

servants, the management of the enterprises and employees, to mention a few. To be sure, a few

small companies which made very little impact on the economy were sold off in the early days of

TCPC, but the privatization of large public enterprises with assets spread all over the country and

employing tens of thousands of people was to wait until decades later. However, a major point to

note is that privatization is as much political as well as technically and financially demanding.

There are methods by which privatization can take place. Mention three of such methods.

Privatization can take place through One hundred asset sale, Liquidation, or through
concessioning.

10.5.1 Types or Methods of Privatization

The following are the methods that the Bureau of Public Enterprises has been using to privatize

government economic assets in Nigeria:

1. One hundred per cent asset sale – used to privatize small public enterprise like Nigerian

Yeast Company Ltd.

2. Core Investment Approach – used in selling large commercial enterprises like oil and gas

marketing companies, telecommunication and power companies, etc. This was the method

used by the Federal Government through the BPE to dispose of its investments in National

Oil and Chemical Company Ltd, where the core investor was Consolidated Oil Ltd (Con

Oil). Ltd and Unipetrol, where the core investor was Oando Ltd. Whenever a core investor

approach is used, it is assumed that the remaining shares are already in the hands of other

162
private investors as in the case of Unipetrol which was previously partly taken over by

government; or that the core investor will shop for other Nigerian investors and ensure a

national spread, as in the case of Nigerian Tourist Company, owners of Federal Palace

Hotel, Victoria Island, Lagos, bought into by Ikeja Hotel Plc as a core investor; or that

after a successful transaction with a core investor, the remaining shares will be sold on the

floors of the stock exchange to as many Nigerian investors as possible. This is the approach

that will be used in the case of NITEL, when a suitable core investor is eventually found

for it

3. Share Issue Privatization. Nigeria has never used this approach wholesale to sell any

public enterprise. It cannot be used in practical terms to sell a large enterprise and if it is a

small company, there will be no need to go to the stock exchange. The best that can be done

is partial sale of shares on the exchange as in case 2 above. The reason it is not feasible to

sell a large concern a hundred percent through share issue or Initial Public Offer, is that, at

the end of the day there may be no competent management on the ground with a track

record to hand over the company and be sure it will remain a going concern.

4. Liquidation – When a state-owned industrial enterprise is moribund and is no longer a

going concern, the best way to dispose of it through privatization, is to first liquidate it.

Government then takes over all its liabilities, including outstanding indebtedness to

workers and pension liabilities, after which the plant and equipment are sold a hundred per

cent to a reputable private investor who has the technical and financial capability to revive

the enterprise. This was the case with National Fertilizer Company (NAFCON), which was

sold to Notore, a Nigerian investor and Aluminium Smelting Company of Nigeria

(ALSCON), which was sold to Rusal of Russia.

5. Concessioning. This is the approach that has been used to privatize Nigerian port terminals,

using the landlord model. Nigerian Ports Authority remains the owner and landlord, but the

163
port terminal assets have been given out to private terminal operators to operate for as long

as 25 years and in return they pay agreed sums to government for the use of the terminals.

They also commit themselves to invest in and develop the terminals for the period they will

control and operate them. There is also Greenfield concessioning, whereby an investor or

concessionaire develops an entirely new port on virgin land. A good example of this is the

new RO-RO Port at Tin Can Island Port Complex, built by the Italian maritime operator

Grimaldi on a Build, Operate and Transfer basis (BOT).

How would you describe the privatization of the National Fertilizer Company

(NAFCON)

The privatization was done through liquidation as the organization went moribund.

Summary of Study Session 10

In this Study Session, you have learnt:

1) that the economic system of any country is designed to allocate the scarce resources

available through a production system to provide output for their citizens.

2) that the regulatory roles of government is meant to ensure that businesses are carried out

within the laid down rules and regulations stipulated in the country,

3) that the facilitating roles of government provide the right environment such as political

stability which will make the economy attractive to both local and international investors.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 10


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

164
outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 1.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.2)


Differentiating between regulatory and facilitating roles of government
SAQ 10.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.3)
Give four reasons for government control of business
SAQ 10.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.4)
State three objectives of the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree (NEPD)
SAQ 10.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.5)
List two benefits of the NEPD
SAQ 10.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.6)
Write brief notes on schedules I and II of the decrees
SAQ 10.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.7)
Outline at least three structural imbalances that led to SAP
SAQ 10.7 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.8)
Itemize four requirements for a successful commercilization process
SAQ 10.8 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.8)
Discuss two methods used by BPE to privatize firms in Nigeria

Multiple Choice Questions


Tick the option that best completes the question
1. In this system the interaction of supply and demand for each good determines what and how
much to produce.
(a) Market system
(b) Command system
(c) Buying system
(d) None of the above

2. In this system, the central planner also determines how production will take place and for
whom the product is produced.
(a) Market system
(b) Command system
(c) Buying system
(d) Production system

3. Under this economic system, individuals own their human capital, and the government owns
most other non-human resources.
(a) Capitalism

165
(b) Communism
(c) Socialism
(d) Mixed economy

4. One way through which government carries out its facilitating role is by promoting free
competition in the economy
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

5. .......... is a formal written enactment of a legislative authority that governs a state, city or
country.
(a) Charter
(b) Statute
(c) Government ownership
(d) Charter or statue
6. This decree initially had two schedules but was increased to three schedules later.
(a) Privatization decree
(b) Indigenization decree
(c) Commercialization decree
(d) SAP
7. In this schedule, the enterprises are those in which Nigerians were expected
to have a majority ownership of at least 60 per cent.
(a) Schedule I
(b) Schedule II
(c) Schedule III
(d) Schedule I and II.
8. When a state-owned industrial enterprise is moribund and is no longer a going
concern, the best way to dispose of it is to first
(a) Commercialize it
(b) liquidate it
(c) Privatize it
(d) None of the above.
9. When government commercializes any of its enterprises, it retains full ownership
of the assets of the enterprise.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

10. The consequences of SAP in Nigeria included collapse of local import-


substitution industries.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

Links to OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References/Suggestions for further readings

166
Bert-Jaap K., Lips, M., Corien, P., and Schellekens M. (2006) Starting points for ICT
Regulations, Deconstructing Prevalent Policy One-Liners. Cambridge. Cambridge
University Press.
Ohanemu, C. N. (2002). Fundamentals of Business Administration. Lagos; Rock Fields
Publishing, Lagos
Iyanda, O. and Bello, J.A (1988). Elements of Business in Nigeria. Lagos. University of
Lagos Press.
Braithwaite, J. and Drahos, P. (2000). Global Business Regulation. Cambridge; Cambridge
University Press.
Massie J.L. (1995). Essentials of Management. 4th edition. New Delhi; Prentice Hall.
McCraw T. (1984). Prophets of Regulation. The Belknap Press
Rugman A.M; Lecraw D.J and Booth L.D. (1998) International Business: Firms and
Environment. McGrawhill International. Wikipedia Free Encyclopedia, 2002
www.ehow.com:Business Environment Analysis, Social Research Foundation, 2009

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

167
STUDY SESSION 11:

GOVERNMENT ECONOMIC POLICIES AND PARTNERSHIPS

Introduction

In the last study session, you were exposed to the roles of government which includes regulatory

and facilitating roles. Some of the economic policies of government such as the Nigerian

Enterprises Promotion Decree, the Structural Adjustment Programme, Commercialization and

Privatization were also discussed. In this study session, we are going to continue with the other

economic policies. We are going to look at the NEEDS programme, the New Partnership for

Africa’s Development (NEPAD), the African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA) and what they

were meant to achieve in our economy. Enjoy yourself as you read on.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 11

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

11.1Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 11.1, 11.3, and 11.4)

11.2State the objectives of the National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy

(NEEDS) (SAQ 11.1 and 11.2)

11.3List the critical areas sought to be addressed by NEEDS (SAQ 11.2)

11.4Describe the New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD) (SAQ 11.3)

11.5Discuss the African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA) (SAQ 11.4)

168
Key Terms: NEEDS, economic development strategy, New Partnership for
Africa’s Development,

11.1 National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy


(NEEDS)

The National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS) was a strategic socio-

economic and political development framework put in place by the President Olusegun Obasanjo

regime in 2004. It was the brainchild of Professor Charles Chukwuma Soludo, then Chief

Economic Adviser to the President, prior to his appointment as the Governor of the Central Bank

of Nigeria. The NEEDS document was based on wide-ranging consultations with various

stakeholders all over the country before the final version was adopted by the Federal Government.

NEEDS was in fact Nigeria’s poverty reduction strategy paper (PRSP), a requirement by the

international community for engagement with Africa’s other less developed countries desirous of

receiving development assistance in the fight against poverty.

The NEEDS vision was based on the 1999 constitution of Nigeria, the Kuru Declaration, previous

initiatives such as Vision 2010 and widespread consultations throughout Nigeria that was part of

the NEEDS process. The programme’s core values recognize the importance of respect for elders,

honesty and accountability, cooperation, industry, discipline, self-confidence and moral courage.

The Kuru Declaration, one of the key documents that informed the NEEDS framework, embodies

truly noble national values which Nigeria and Nigerians should strive to inculcate. These are to

build a truly great African democratic country, politically united, integrated and stable,

economically prosperous, socially organized, with equal opportunity for all, and responsibility

from all, to become the catalyst of (African) Renaissance and making adequate all-embracing

contributions, sub-regionally, regionally and globally.

169
NEEDS focused on four key strategies: (1) reforming government and institutions (2) growing the

private sector (3) implementing a social charter and (4) reorienting the value system of the

populace. It was based on the notion that these goals can be achieved only by creating an

environment in which business can thrive, government is redirected to providing basic services,

and people are empowered to take advantage of the new livelihood opportunities the plan was to

stimulate.

NEEDS was not just an economic development strategy, but was also an ambitious change

programme with a clear focus on fighting corruption and re-orienting Nigerians away from a rent-

seeking mentality and relating unproductive and unedifying attitude to making a living. These

values have become deeply entrenched in national psyche over a period of time. NEEDS therefore

sought to make it clear that corruption and graft would be punished. An elaborate public awareness

programme was to be mounted by National Orientation Agency and related state government

organs and in collaboration with NGOs and community based organizations (CBOs) and other

stakeholders to ensure that the fight against corruption was broad-based.

NEEDS sought to address critical areas such as:

• Health/HIV AIDS – reducing the huge disease burden and the HIV/AIDS pandemic

• Education – realizing that half of Nigeria’s population is young, the strategic role of education in

knowledge diffusion, skill building and human capital development

• Agriculture – recognizing the primacy of agriculture and giving farmers the necessary

tool, materials and finance they need to produce food in abundance, create wealth and

employment and transform the rural sector

• Pension Reform – putting in place a modern contributory pension scheme

• Infrastructure – bridging the huge infrastructural gap necessary for Nigeria’s economic

development and social transformation

170
• Promoting the Private Sector – as the engine of growth of the economy

• Political and Administrative Reform –changing the way government does business,

shrinking the size of the public sector and drastically reducing the high cost of governance

11.1.1 What Made NEEDS Different

NEEDS as a development strategy was different for the following reasons

1. It was based on widespread consultations – a process that started in 2001, which led to the

preparation of Nigeria’s interim Poverty Reduction Strategy Paper (PRSP)

2. NEEDS involved collaborative effort at the federal and state levels which connected

problems on the ground with programmes at the federal and state levels

3. NEEDS was designed as a feasible plan because it was based on wide-ranging consultations

which allowed the drafting committee deep insight into real changes and problems the

ordinary people of Nigeria grappled with on a daily basis and proffering problem solving

tools that stood a good chance of addressing the issues efficaciously.

11.1.2 Empowerment programme

The concept of empowerment is important to NEEDS which recognizes that development begins

and ends with the people – the people are both the agents and the beneficiaries of the development

process. It is therefore important to involve them both in the planning of development programmes

and in the implementation of such programmes. In Nigeria’s case as in the case of other African

and developing countries where poverty has become a major problem over the years, it was equally

necessary to give the people the tools that will enable them help themselves out of poverty. Such

tools are education and skill development, entrepreneurship, and access to finance. As part of the

empowerment agenda of NEEDS, the need to support and encourage the ‘active poor’ was

recognized. This agenda is being aggressively pursued through enterprise development and skill

acquisition programmes and access to finance through microfinance banking.

171
11.1.3 Assessment of the Success of the NEEDS Programme

The first phase of NEEDS (NEEDS I) came to an end in 2007 and the second phase (NEEDS II)

was expected to be compiled and launched subsequently. In fact the process of extensive

consultations for the launch of NEEDS II had almost been concluded when it became a victim of

the syndrome of policy discontinuity by the succeeding regimes in Nigeria. In place of NEEDS,

the President Umar Musa Yar’ Adua regime put in place the Seven Point Agenda, which was little

more than a line by line itemization of seven areas of political, economic and social focus, a

carryover of his presidential campaign manifesto. The Seven Point Agenda lacked any conceptual

framework or elaborate content. It was not based on consultations and lacked an action plan, but

was sustained by an intensive propaganda on government media.

The unceremonious phasing out of the NEEDS development blueprint and the failure to replace it

with anything close was a national disservice. NEEDS was a brilliant blueprint for an all-embracing

national development. Some of its achievements in the 2004 – 2007 planning period included the

following:

• The use of NEEDS by the international community as the basis for cooperation with and

development assistance to Nigeria, as they found the NEEDS document to be a brilliantly

crafted PSPR.

• The granting of debt relief by both the Paris Club and the London Club

• The banking consolidation programme that increased the capital base of Nigerian banks to

a minimum of N25 billion from N2 billion and reduced the number of banks from about

84 to 25

• The institution of a modern contributory pension scheme

• The institution of a modern microfinance banking system

• The tremendous boost to the private sector as engine of growth in the economy

• Phenomenal growth in the Nigerian Stock Exchange

172
• The successful privatization of key government enterprises and the concessioning of

Nigerian ports

• Phenomenal growth in the telecommunication sector

• Rapid expansion of access to higher education through licensing of private universities and

other higher education institutions.

Why was the NEEDS programme different from other developmental strategies?

Because it was based on widespread consultations which involved collaborative


effort at both federal and state levels, and was designed as a feasible plan unlike
other programmes.

11.2 The New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD)


The New Partnership for Africa’s Development (NEPAD) is a vision and strategic framework for

Africa’s socioeconomic and political transformation put in place by the African Union to harness

the energy of all African country and refocus their development strategies with the aim of achieving

rapid growth and development.

The NEPAD strategic framework document seeks to develop an integrated, comprehensive and

sustainable development framework for Africa.

11.2.1 History of NEPAD

The framework for the establishment of NEPAD was adopted at a meeting of African Heads of

State and Government under the auspices of the Organization of African Unity (OAU) in 2001 and

subsequently ratified by the African Union (AU), the successor organization to the OAU in 2002.

NEPAD was the fusion of three related but parallel visions about how to move Africa forward at

the dawn of the new Millennium. These were the Millennium Africa Recovery Plan (MAP),

championed by the then South African President Thabo Mbeki; the Omega Plan, envisioned by

President Abdoulaye Wade of Senegal. MAP and the Omega Plan were then coalesced into a single

173
blueprint, which became known as the New African Initiative (NAI), which in turn led to NEPAD

in 2001, in a more elaborated form. The three initiatives that gave birth to NEPAD and shared a

common concern for the rapid development of the African continent, but they also had differences

in emphasis on regional priorities. In the process of reconciling these differences, certain

compromises had to be made. In the process of est-ablishing NEPAD, the Organization of African

Unity mandated five member states of Algeria, Egypt, Nigeria, Senegal and South Africa to put

together its framework. Thus these five countries are the founding members of NEPAD.

11.2.2 Objectives of NEPAD

The overall objective of NEPAD is to eradicate poverty in Africa and to place African countries

both individually and collectively on a path of sustainable growth and development to thus halt the

marginalization of Africa in the globalization process. At the core of the NEPAD process is its

African ownership, which must be retained and strongly promoted, so as to meet the legitimate

aspirations of the African peoples. While the principle of partnership with the rest of the world is

equally vital to this process, such partnership must be based on mutual respect, dignity, shared

responsibility and mutual accountability. The key objectives of NEPAD can thus be summarized

as including the following:

a) To eradicate poverty.

b) To place African countries, both individually and collectively on a path of sustainable

growth and development.

c) To halt the marginalization of Africa in the globalization process and enhance its full and

beneficial integration into the global economy.

d) To accelerate sustainable development by ensuring peace and security, democracy and

good political, economic and corporate governance, regional co-operation and integration

and capacity building.

174
11.2.3 The principles of NEPAD

NEPAD was founded on the following principles:

• African ownership and leadership, as well as broad and deep participation by all sectors

of society;

• Good governance as a basic requirement for peace, sucurity and sustainable, political and

socio-economic development;

• Anchoring the redevelopment of the continent on the resources and resourcefulness of the

African people;

• Partnership between and amongst African peoples;

• Acceleration of regional and continental integration;

• Building the competitiveness of African countries and the continent;

• Forging of a new partnership with the industrialized world by, amongst other things,

ensuring that it changes the unequal relationship between Africa and the developed world;

and

• Commitment to ensuring that all Partnerships with NEPAD are linked to the Millennium

Development Goals and other agreed development goals and targets.

11.2.4 The elements of NEPAD's strategic focus

The following constitute the elements of the strategic focus of NEPAD which is primarily

concerned with the economic resurgence and vibrancy of Africa:

 To reduce the risk profile of doing business in Africa;

 To create the conditions conducive for investment, high economic growth and sustainable

development;

 To increase Africa's competitiveness in the world economy;

175
 To transform the unequal and donor/recipient relationship with the developed countries and

multilateral institutions to a new partnership that is based on mutual responsibility and

respect; and

 To increase investment on the continent in order to ensure social and economic

development.

In sum, NEPAD calls for adapted policy reforms and increased investments in the areas of

agriculture and food security, science and technology, environment, trade and market access,

governance, infrastructure (energy, transport and water sanitation, and information and

communication technologies), gender and capacity development.

11.2.5 How NEPAD programme is governed

The work of the NEPAD Planning and Coordinating Agency – which is tasked with the

implementation of the NEPAD Programme – is overseen by the NEPAD Heads of State and

Government Orientation Committee (HSGOC) and a Steering Committee. The Chairperson of the

African Union Commission exercises supervisory authority over the Agency.

11.2.6 NEPAD Planning and Coordinating Agency (NEPAD Agency)

Right from inception in 2001 when it was established by the African Union, the Secretariat of

NEPAD was in Johannesburg, South Africa. Concern has grown over the years about the risk of it

being run as a parallel organization, almost entirely separate and distinct from the structures of the

African Union, which is based in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia. So the result of the effort to integrate

NEPAD more formally into the AU system is the NEPAD Planning and Coordination Agency,

which was established by the 14th African Union Summit decision as the institutional vehicle for

implementing the African Union Development agenda. Designated as the technical body of the

African Union, the core mandate of the NEPAD Agency is to facilitate and coordinate the

implementation of regional and continental priority programmes and projects and to push for

176
partnerships, resource mobilization and research and knowledge management. The secretariat of

the agency will be retained in South Africa, perhaps as a reward for the enormous effort South

Africa has invested in the NEPAD vision.

11.2.7 African Ownership

A major feature of NEPAD is the concept of African ownership, which is one of the key principles

upon which NEPAD was founded. What this means in practical terms is that the vision for NEPAD

was conceived by African leaders and their peoples and not thrust upon them by external forces,

as was the case with many programmes of the past – which invariably failed due to lack of local

ownership and local content. Secondly, African governments, peoples and institutions also

developed the contents of the various programmes of NEPAD. Thirdly, in furtherance of the

principle of ownership, NEPAD is strategically hoisted on the fulcrum of partnership: firstly,

partnerships among African countries themselves on a continental scale on the political, economic

and social spheres in a dimension that had never been witnessed before. In particular, partnership

with the African private sector and civil societies (which is a clear departure from the past when

policies and programmes were exclusively conceived and implemented by the public sector

without the active involvement of the majority of the people themselves) was emphasized. Of great

significance also is partnership with the international community, comprising essentially the

United Nations system, the European Union and the G8/G20, which have adopted the NEPAD

strategic framework as the basis of their economic and social cooperation programmes with

African countries

From the foregoing, it is clear that NEPAD is not just a public sector programme but a strategic

framework for the social, economic and political transformation of Africa. NEPAD is not a project

but an elaborate multi-sectoral programme of change, involving numerous stakeholders and

partners. Indeed, the most crucial and strategic of all the stakeholders and partners is the private

sector. The private sector is expected to partner with government to implement various projects

177
under the umbrella of public, private partnerships, broadly defined, through provision of expertise,

executive capacity, mobilization and provision of long-term capital, both local and foreign and

identification of entrepreneurial/investment opportunities. Others include the formation of

partnerships, both with local and foreign business and technical partners for the execution of large

scale projects. Partnerships were also generated for participation in the financing and execution of

infrastructural projects in the form of Build, Operate and Transfer (BOT), leases, management

contracts, concessions, and other forms of public private partnership arrangements, as alternative

models of public procurement. The provision of professional services is also part of the

opportunities that NEPAD offers to the private sector, including professional firms and practices.

NEPAD had key objectives. Mention two of them.

Two of NEPAD’s key objectives were to (i) eradicate poverty in Africa and (ii) halt the
marginalisation of Africa in the globalization process.

11.3 The African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA)


The African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA), an American government initiative to boost

trade relationship with African countries on a preferential basis, was signed into law on May 18,

2000 by President Bill Clinton as Title 1 of The Trade and Development Act of 2000. The Act

offers tangible incentives for African countries to continue their efforts to open their economies

and build free markets. President Bush signed amendments to AGOA, also known as AGOA II,

into law on August 6, 2002 as Sec. 3108 of the Trade Act of 2002. AGOA II substantially expands

preferential access for imports from beneficiary Sub-Saharan African countries.

By modifying certain provisions of the African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA), the AGOA

Acceleration Act of 2004 (AGOA III, signed by President Bush on July 12, 2004) extends

preferential access for imports from beneficiary Sub Saharan African countries until September

178
30, 2015; extended third country fabric provision for three years, from September 2004 until

September 2007; and provides additional Congressional guidance to the Administration on how to

administer the textile provisions of the bill.

The Africa Investment Incentive Act of 2006 (signed by President Bush on December 20, 2006)

further amends portions of the African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA) and is referred to as

"AGOA IV". The legislation extends the third country fabric provision for an additional five years,

from September 2007 until September 2012; adds an abundant supply provision; designates certain

denim articles as being in abundant supply; and allows lesser developed beneficiary sub-Saharan

African countries export certain textile articles under AGOA.

AGOA provides reforming African countries with the most liberal access to the U.S. market

available to any country or region with which the United States does not have a Free Trade

Agreement. It supports U.S. business by encouraging reform of Africa’s economic and commercial

regimes, which will build stronger markets and more effective partners for U.S. firms. AGOA

expands the list of products which eligible Sub-Saharan African countries may export to the United

States subject to zero import duty under the Generalized System of Preferences (GSP). While

general GSP covers approximately 4,600 items, AGOA GSP applies to more than 6,400 items.

AGOA GSP provisions are in effect until September 30, 2015.

11.3.1 Long-Term Potential Benefits of AGOA to African Countries

AGOA can change the course of trade relations between Africa and the United States for the long

term, while helping millions of African families find opportunities to build prosperity:

• By reinforcing African reform efforts;

• By providing improved access to U.S. technical expertise, credit, and markets; and

• By establishing a high-level dialogue on trade and investment.

179
Since its implementation, AGOA has encouraged substantial new investments, trade, and job

creation in Africa. It has helped to promote Sub-Saharan Africa's integration into the multilateral

trading system and a more active role in global trade negotiations. It has also contributed to

economic and commercial reforms which make African countries more attractive commercial

partners for U.S. companies.

11.3.2 Implementation

An AGOA Implementation Subcommittee of the Trade Policy Staff Committee (TPSC) was

established to implement AGOA. Among the most important implementation issues are the

following:

• Determination of country eligibility;

• Determination of the products eligible for zero tariff under expansion of the Generalized

System of Preferences (GSP);

• Determinations of compliance with the conditions for apparel benefits;

• Establishment of the U.S.-Sub-Saharan Africa Trade and Economic Forum; and

• Provisions for technical assistance to help countries qualify for benefits.

11.3.3 Country Eligibility

The U.S. Government intends that the largest possible number of Sub-Saharan African countries

can take advantage of AGOA. President Clinton issued a proclamation on October 2, 2000

designating 34 countries in Sub-Saharan Africa as eligible for the trade benefits of AGOA. The

list is amended from time to time, in line with the dictates of American foreign policy, not just U.S.

trade relations with Africa. Critics of the programme hold up this amendment to buttress their

argument that AGOA is a tool of neo-colonial dominion by the American government. For

example, effective from June 30, 2008, the President Bush designated Comoros as AGOA eligible

and effective January 1, 2009, President Bush removed Mauritania from the list of AGOA eligible

countries for reasons not unconnected with the military coup in that country.

180
The Act authorizes the President of the United States to designate countries as eligible to receive

the benefits of AGOA if they are determined to have established, or are making continual progress

toward establishing the following: (1) market-based economies (2) the rule of law and political

pluralism (3) elimination of barriers to U.S. trade and investment (4) protection of intellectual

property (5) efforts to combat corruption (6) policies to reduce poverty (7) increasing availability

of health care and educational opportunities (8) protection of human rights and worker rights, and

(9) elimination of certain child labour practices. These criteria have been embraced

overwhelmingly by the vast majority of African nations, which are striving to achieve the

objectives although none is expected to have fully implemented the entire list.

The eligibility criteria for GSP and AGOA substantially overlap, and countries must be GSP

eligible in order to receive AGOA’s trade benefits including both expanded GSP and the apparel

provisions. Although GSP eligibility does not imply AGOA eligibility, 47 of the 48 Sub-Saharan

African countries are currently GSP eligible.

11.3.4 GSP Product Eligibility

AGOA authorizes the President of the United States to provide duty-free treatment under GSP for

any article, after the U.S. Trade Representative (USTR) and the U.S. International Trade

Commission (USITC) have determined that the article is not import sensitive when imported from

African countries. On December 21, 2000, President Clinton extended duty-free treatment under

GSP to AGOA eligible countries for more than 1,800 tariff line items in addition to the standard

GSP list of approximately 4,600 items available to non-AGOA GSP beneficiary countries. The

additional GSP line items which include such previously excluded items as footwear, luggage,

handbags, watches, and flatware were implemented after an extensive process of public comment

and review. AGOA extends GSP for eligible Sub-Saharan African beneficiaries until September

30, 2015. Sub-Saharan African beneficiary countries are also exempted from competitive need

limitations which cap the GSP benefits available to beneficiaries in other regions

181
AGOA had implementation sub-committee established. State two of the most important
implementation issues they are to handle.

They are to determine the country eligibility and secondly provide for technical assistance
to help countries qualify for benefits

11.3.5 Apparel Provisions

AGOA provides duty-free and quota-free treatment for eligible apparel articles made in qualifying

sub-Saharan African countries through 2015. Qualifying articles include: apparel made of U.S.

yarns and fabrics; apparel made of sub-Saharan African (regional) yarns and fabrics until 2015,

subject to a cap; apparel made in a designated lesser-developed country of third-country yarns and

fabrics until 2012, subject to a cap; apparel made of yarns and fabrics not produced in commercial

quantities in the United States; textile or textile articles originating entirely in one or more lesser-

developed beneficiary sub-Saharan African countries; certain cashmere and merino wool sweaters;

and eligible hand-loomed, handmade, or folklore articles, and ethnic printed fabrics.

Under a Special Rule for lesser-developed beneficiary countries, those countries with a per capita

GNP under $1,500 in 1998, will enjoy an additional preference in the form of duty-free/quota-free

access for apparel made from fabric originating anywhere in the world. The Special Rule is in

effect until September 30, 2012 and is subject to a cap. AGOA IV continues the designation of

Botswana and Namibia as lesser-developed beneficiary countries, qualifying both countries for the

Special Rule.

AGOA IV provides for special rules for fabrics or yarns produced in commercial quantities (or

"abundant supply") in any designated sub-Saharan African country for use in qualifying apparel

articles. Upon receiving a petition from any interested party, the International Trade Commission

will determine the quantity of such fabrics or yarns that must be sourced from the region before

182
applying the third country fabric provision. It also provides for 30 million square meter equivalents

(SMEs) of denim to be determined to be in abundant supply beginning October 1, 2006. The U.S.

International Trade Commission will provide further guidance on how it will implement this

provision.

Preferential treatment for apparel took effect on October 1, 2000, but beneficiary countries must

first establish effective visa systems to prevent illegal trans-shipment and use of counterfeit

documentation, and that they have instituted required enforcement and verification

procedures. Specific requirements of the visa systems and verification procedures were

promulgated to African governments via U.S. embassies on September 21, 2000. The Secretary of

Commerce is directed to monitor apparel imports on a monthly basis to guard against surges. If

increased imports are causing or threatening serious damage to the U.S. apparel industry, the

President is to suspend duty-free treatment for the article(s) in question. The U.S. Government is

now reviewing applications for approval of the required visa and enforcement mechanisms from

AGOA eligible countries.

Whose initiative was the African Growth and Opportunity Act (AGOA)?

It was an American government initiative to boost trade relationship with African


countries on a preferential basis.

Summary of Study Session11

In this study session you have learnt:


1) the different economic policies of government like Nigeria Enterprises Promotion Decree
(NEPD), Structural Adjustment Programme (SAP), Commercialization, Privatization etc.
The NEPD known as the indigenization decree was promulgated in 1972 and has been
amended many times.

183
2) the sole aim of the decree was to give Nigerians a sense of belonging and control over
largely the commercial sector and the small and medium scale sector of the economy such
that the initial capital requirement and required technical and managerial skills were
considered to be within the reach of Nigerians. Objectives and benefits of NEPD were also
looked at.

3) the requirements for a successful commercialization of a public enterprise as well as


objectives for commercialization were also looked at. In the same vein,

4) the structural imbalances or reasons that informed the introduction of the Structural
Adjustment programme and the measures taken to address the imbalances were also
examined. Finally, privatization and types of privatization were treated.

The session also discussed some of the critical issues that NEEDS was meant to address. It also

examined the success and failure of NEEDS. The historical evolution and objectives of NEPAD

were discussed as well as the principles on which NEPAD was founded. The concept of the African

ownership of NEPAD was also examined. In addition, the AGOA framework and objectives as

well as the concept of country eligibility were all discussed.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 11


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learning

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 11.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.1, 11.2, and 11.3)


NEEDS focused on four key strategies. List them.
SAQ 11.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.2 and 11.3)
Outline four critical areas that NEEDS sought to address.
SAQ 11.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.4)
Mention five principles on which NEPAD was founded and state two of its objectives.
SAQ 11.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.5)
Explain two long-term potentials of AGOA to African Countries

184
Multiple Choice Questions
Choose the right option that best suits the question
1. Right from inception in 2001 when it was established, the Secretariat of NEPAD has been
in...............
a) Abuja, Nigeria
b) Johannesburg, South Africa
c) Cairo, Egypt
d) Addis Ababa, Ethiopia.

2. The AGOA Acceleration Act also termed AGOA III was signed by
(a) President Bill Clinton on August 6, 2002
(b) President Bush on July 12, 2004
(c) President Bush on December 20, 2006
(d) President Bill Clinton on May 18, 2000

3. The key objective of NEPAD includes all but one


(a) Accelerate sustainable development by ensuring peace and security
(b) Eradicate poverty
(c) Aid marginalization of Africa in the globalization process
(d) (b) Encourage growth and development through good democratic principles,
corporate
(e) governance etc.

4. The framework for the establishment of NEPAD was adopted at a meeting of African Heads
of State and Government under the auspices of the OAU in 2001
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

5. The critics of the AGOA act argue that it is a tool of neo-colonial dominion by the American
government.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) No relevant option

Links OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

References/Suggestions for further reading


Adegbite, E .O. Ayadi, Felix O., and Ayadi F. S .(2008). “Structural Adjustment, Financial
Sector Development and Economic Prosperity in Nigeria,” International Research

185
Journal of Finance and Economics, Issue 15. http://www.eurojournals.com/finance.html.

African Union (2010). NPCA Strategic Direction, 2010-2013: Facilitating the Delivery of
High-Quality Programmes and Projects to Promote Africa’s Development and
Regional Integration, Addis Ababa, May 2010

Anyanwu, J. C. (1992). “President Babangida's Structural Adjustment Programme and


Inflation in Nigeria, Journal of Social Development in Africa 7,1,5.24
Bankole A, (2009) Coordinator (External Relations and Partnerships, NEPAD Secretariat),
“AU/NEPAD African Action Plan: Roadmap for Regional Integration - Framework to Fast-
track Regional Integration and Global Partnerships in Support of Africa’s Development
Agenda.” Paper presented at the Regional Media Dialogue on NEPAD, The Vaal,
Guateng Province, South Africa, February 19 – 20.,
National Planning Commission (2004). National Economic Empowerment and Development
Strategy (NEEDS), Abuja.
NCEMA, “Structural Adjustment Programme in Nigeria: Causes, Processes and Outcomes,”
Revised Technical Proposal submitted by National Centre for Economic Management
& Administration (NCEMA), Ibadan
Organization of African Unity (2001). The New Partnership for Africa’s Development,
October 2001
Sasore, G. M. (2005). Special Adviser To the President on Export Programmes/Chief
Executive Officer, Nigerian Export Promotion Council, “Trade Opportunities Under
AGOA, a Paper presented at the Conference on the “Agricultural & Food Situation
and Trade Opportunities in Nigeria” organized by IFDC-MISTOWA (Regional
MarketInformation Systems and Traders’ Organizations in West Africa) held at Kano
Durbar Hotel, May 26 – 27.

186
Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

187
STUDY SESSION 12:

BUSINESS AND CONTEMPORARY ISSUES

Introduction

This session will take you through the elements of international trade, globalization and other

related organizations and bodies that influence international financial systems. You will also learn

about various economic blocks that are used to promote regional and international cooperation.

Learning Outcomes for Study session 12

After you have carefully studied this Session, you should be able to:

12.1Define and use correctly all the key words printed in bold (SAQ 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 12.4 and
12.5).

12.2Discuss the concept of international trade, benefits and disadvantages (SAQ 12.4).

12.3Define globalization and understand its advantages and disadvantages (SAQ 12.2).

12.4List the contribution of International Monetary Fund and the World Bank to international
business (SAQ 12.1 and 12.3).

12.5Identify various regional economic blocks and their operations (SAQ 12.5).

Key Terms: Economic block, International monetary fund, globalization,


international trade

188
12.1 Concept of International Trade
International trade is the trade between nations of the world. It is trade between individual firms

and government of the countries.

12.1.1 Reasons for international trade

• Some countries can produce certain commodities at cheaper rates than others.

• Most countries also depend on other countries for the purchase of commodities which are

needed to supplement home production.

• Difference in productive capacity.

• Inequitable distribution of natural resources e.g climate, soil, mineral resources, different

technology, different peoples and skills.

• To enjoy comparative advantage. The law of comparative advantage states that a country

will benefit if they specialize in the production of commodities in which they have

comparative cost advantage and exchange those commodities which others can produce

more cheaply.

12.1.2 Advantages of International Trade

The following are the advantages of international trade;

1. It ensures equitable distribution of natural resources: international trade makes it

possible for a country to import resources that are not available in her country.

2. It brings about world peace.

3. Prevention of monopoly: International trade prevents the local manufacturer of goods

from increasing prices unreasonably.

4. There is interdependence among nations for raw materials.

5. International trade also leads to specialization and increase in the standard of living

189
of the people and it encourages economic development of nations.

12.1.3 Disadvantages of International trade

1. International trade could cause unemployment in industries if more manufactured and

agro-allied goods are imported at the detriment of the local or infant industries.

2. Discouragement of self-reliance: availability of foreign goods in the local market may

discourage the production of such goods locally.

3. Importation of harmful goods.

4. International trade could be injurious to a country’s culture.

12.1.4 Barriers to International trade

• Distance barrier

• Language problem

• Problem of weights and measures

• Political barrier

• Economic barrier

12.1.5 Documents used in International Trade

An indent: this is the order which gives the details, about the types, and quality of goods required

by the buyer.

Consular invoice: The document becomes very necessary because there may not be trading

relationship between two countries and as a result, the origin of the goods needs to be confirmed.

The freight note states the charges for carrying the goods.

Bill of lading: The bill of lading is the most important document because it serves as a document

of title to the goods at place of origin or destination. It specifies the quantity of goods, port of

loading and port or discharge.

Sanitary Health Certificate: The certificate certifies that the foodstuff (e.g. meat)

190
is fit for human consumption.

Certificate of Inspection: the manufacturer or supplier issues the certificate to show that they

have inspected the goods shipped and they are in conformity with buyer‘s purchase order.

The pro-forma invoice contains the particulars of exporter and importers.

Form M: the importer fills a set of the form by transferring the information on the pro-forma

invoice into the form M. Thereafter, the form M and the pro-forma invoice are sent to the importer’s

bank for processing.

12.1.6 Means of payment in foreign trade

The means of payment include mail transfer, telegraphic and cable transfer, guaranteed mail

transfer, foreign bill of exchange, travel’s cheque, bank’s draft and documentary credit

Nigerian firms usually have business transactions with firms of other countries and

sometimes even with governments of other nations. What kind of trade is this?

This is called international trade since it is between nations of the world.

12.1.7 Advantages of the letter of credit

a. Irrevocable credit cannot be amended or cancelled without the consent of the seller.

b. The buyer cannot withhold without payment for goods for any reason.

c. Credit is used for financing export by the seller who receives payment before arrival of

goods at destination.

d. The buyer can obtain finance from his bank for his import.

e. There is the assurance for the shipment of goods within the delivery date as payment against

the presentation of document by the seller.

191
12.1.8 Disadvantages of the letter of credit

a. It may lose its commercial value when the seller fails to comply with any of the terms of

the credit.

b. There may be delay in payment or the transaction. This could stem from irregularities on

the documents presented for the credit.

c. The buyer bears all risks and cost of opening the credit.

d. Once the credit (irrevocable) is issued by his bank, (he cannot cancel the credit without the

consent of the issuing bank and the confirming bank.

In Nigeria today, people patronize foreign made goods over and above local made ones.
How do you consider this?

This is considered as one of the disadvantages of International trade.

12.2 Globalisation

Globalization is the integration of economies with regards to market for goods, factors of

production and technology. Globalization gives equal access to production and investment

discourse across the world by the entrepreneur whose main objective is to take advantage of it.

It provides for economic independence of countries worldwide through the increasing volume and

variety of cross border transaction on goods and services and of international capital flows through

the more rapid and wide spread diffusion of technology.

12.2.1 Advantages of Globalization

1. It ensures the increase in the output of a country as a result of the removal of trade

restriction.

192
2. It permits countries to concentrate on the production of goods and services in which they

have comparative advantage.

3. It raises productivity and improves the living standard of the people through international

division of labour and efficient allocation of resources.

4. It makes a country to have access to a large volume and diversified sources of external

funds or finance.

5. Less well developed countries are opened up to investors.

6. Accessibility of countries to financial assistance such as the World Bank, International

Monetary Funds, European Union and the United Nations.

7. Globalization ensures acceptability of a country to foreign products and makes

consumers enjoy different types of goods and services at low prizes.

12.2.2 Disadvantages of Globalisation

1. It leads to dumping of goods/products

2. It reduces the demand for the products of infant and local industries

3. It may result to unemployment due to capital flight.

12.2.3 Features of the world that aid globalization.

1. The world is rapidly globalizing in both its trade and investment flow that today no

country can take economic decision in isolation.

2. Many companies are internalizing.

3. There is free trade, finance and information for economic growth and human welfare.

4. There is closer integration of the countries and people of the world, which has been

brought about by reduction in the cost of communication and transportation and the

breaking down of artificial barriers to the flow of goods and services

5. The distribution between international and domestic economic policies has become

irrelevant.

193
6. There is now a borderless world.

7. Telecommunication development.

8. Transportation

9. Technological advancement

Mention two disadvantages of globalization?

Globalization leads to dumping of goods and may kill the infant and local industries if
care is not taken.

12.4 Regional Economic Integration


Regional Economic integration is an agreement between contiguous nations to allow for the free

flow of ideas investment funds, technology, goods and services and free movement of persons

within the region in which large markets subsist with the benefit of comparative advantage and

economies of scale.

12.4.1 Advantages/Reasons

• Removal of all impediments to free trade and investments.

• Efficient resource allocation to promote greater output of goods and services and overall

economic well-being of member states.

• Promotion of trade creation and trade diversion.

• Aids the achievement of GATT and WTO.

• Attachment of economic growth and development.

12.4.2 Disadvantages/Problems

➢ Loss of some measure of economic and political independence by member states.

➢ Inability to fix tariffs and impose restriction not in line with the framework of the

integration agreement.

194
➢ Close monitoring of the monetary and fiscal policies of the member states for the purpose

of achieving the overall objectives of the economic community.

12.4.3 Types of economic unions

Specially, the economic unions include the General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT),

World Trade Organization (WTO), Organization of Economic Co-operation and Development

(OECD), European Economic Community (EEC), African Economic Commission (AEC),

Economic Community of West African State (ECOWAS), Southern African Development

Coordination Committee (SADCC), International Monetary Fund (IMF), among others. Let us take

a look at some of the economic blocks.

There are different types of economic unions. List three of them.

Some of the economic unions are World Trade Organization (WTO), Economic
Community of West African State (ECOWAS), and the International Monetary Fund
(IMF).

12.5 The Economic Community of West African State (ECOWAS)


The ECOWAS is a body set up for the economic integration of West African countries, the main

purpose of which is to promote rapid economic development of West African people. It is made

up of sixteen (16) states of both Anglo-phone and Franco-phone countries. It was founded on May

28th 1975 when sixteen West-African countries signed the treaty in Lagos.

It has been observed that the West African Governments are aware of the poor economic situation

of their people. They are aware of the poverty, low standards of living and health hazards of their

people. They therefore addressed themselves to the important issue of finding solutions to poor

conditions caused by:

➢ Low level technology

195
➢ Few dynamic entrepreneurs who are prepared to take risks

➢ Poor economic planning as a result of lack of relevant statistics, political and official will.

➢ Low level investment.

➢ Low level savings which makes for low level capital accumulations.

➢ Smallness of West African markets and strong competition from foreign markets.

➢ Low per capita income.

➢ Poor infrastructural facilities.

12.6 General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT)


The agreement was initiated in 1947 to ensure the liberalization of the world trade.

Marrakesh agreement established the World Trade Organization (WTO) on the 1st of January, 1995

with its Headquarters at Geneva, Switzerland.

12.6.1 Basic Principles of GATT

❖ Trade liberalization

❖ Reciprocity

❖ Non- discrimination

❖ Transparency of regulation

❖ Fair trade

❖ Trade restriction under serious and special economic conditions.

12.6.2 Objectives of GATT

GATT was established in order to:

▪ Ensure trade liberalization

▪ Make optimal use of world’s resources to guarantee sustainable development.

▪ Bring about a good relation in the field or trade and economic endeavour.

196
▪ Improved standard of living and expansion of production and trade in goods and services

of member countries.

▪ Ensure reciprocal and mutually advantageous arrangement for reduction in tariffs and

other barriers to international trade.

▪ Improve members’ market access domestic support especially in the form of subsidy and

enhance export competition.

▪ Prevent restriction and distribution in agricultural market.

▪ Gradually reduce support and distortion for agricultural products over an agreed period of

time.

12.6.3 Specific areas of agreement

Agreements were directed at:

- Tariff and trade

- Agriculture

- Application of sanitary and phyto-sanitary measures

- Textiles and clothing

- Technical barrier to trade

- Trade related investment measures

- Pre-shipment inspection

- Rules of origin

- Import licensing procedures

- Subsidies and countervailing measures

12.7 World Trade Organization (WTO)


The World Trade Organization (WTO) was established on 1st of January, 1995 with the

objectives and functions that are highlighted below:

197
12.7.1 Objectives of WTO

❖ Enhancement of international relations in the areas of trade and economic endeavours’

❖ Full employment

❖ Enhancement of real services to boost global output

❖ Raising the standard of living of the people

12.7.2 Functions of WTO

The WTO performs the functions stated below:

▪ Provides the framework for implementation and administration of trade agreements

▪ Provides the forum for negotiation among members on matters affecting multilateral trade

relations

▪ Administers trade policy renew mechanization when necessary

▪ Prevents members from taking actions injurious to global trade development

▪ Cooperates with IMF and World Bank ongood global economic policy making

Structure of WTO
The WTO is structured into:

a) Secretariat headed by a director-general

b) Ministerial conference

c) General council

d) Council for trade in goods

e) Council for trade in services

f) Council for trade-related aspects of intellectual property rights

12.8 The World Bank


This is one of the largest sources of the development assistances in the world .The International

Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD) later re-christened the World Bank was

initially established to support the reconstruction of Europe after World War II. The World Bank

198
came into existence in 1944 as a sister body to the IMF. It provided lending fund for

commercialization and trade, provide technical' assistance in order to facilitate economic

development among its poorer member countries. The bank operates in more than 100

developing economies through government agencies, non-governmental organization and private

sector to formulate assistance strategies.

12.8.1 Groups of World Bank

The World Bank is made up of the following groups:

1. International Developing Agency (IDA). The group provides loan assistances to middle

income and poorer countries

2. International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD). The group also provides

loan assistances to middle income and poorer countries like the international developing

agency

3. International Finance and Cooperation (IFC).It promotes private sector investment, both

foreign and domestic services as an investor and broker between foreign investors, local

partners and government authorities.

4. Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA). It promotes foreign direct investment

by offering political risk assurance. It conveys direct benefits to host countries by

providing information on job creation and training for employers.

5. International Centre for settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). It offers opportunity

to new big investors entering new markets and government to provide enabling

environment. The group also creates effective and stable financial markets. There is also

the provision of facilities for the settlements by conciliation or arbitration of investment

dispute between investor and their host.

12.9 International Monetary Fund (IMF)


The International Monetary Fund was established, along with the World Bank, at a conference in

199
Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, USA, in the closing stages of World War II.

12.9.1 Composition of IMF


The diagram below displays the composition of the IMF.

Fig. 12.1: Composition of the IMF

12.9.2 Features oF IMF

The IMF is engaged in:

1. Promoting global monetary and exchange stability.

2. Facilitating the expansion and balanced growth of international trade for current

transactions.

3. Assisting in the establishment of a multilateral system of payments

4. Compiling statistics and evaluation of its member countries’ economies

(Nearly all nations in UN are members of IMF)

200
5. Intervening in financial crisis to provide loans and conditions for restructuring the economy

to avoid future crisis.

6. Providing external assessment of the economy, which helps the government to implement

popular ideas.

7. Promoting international monetary co-operation and global financial stability.

8. Encouraging economic growth.

9. Giving financial advice to countries about how to run their economies.

10. Providing loans to countries experiencing problem of balance of payment for restoration

and sustainable economic growth.

11. Financing of temporary balance of payment needs.

12. Keeping surveillance over member’s economic policies.

13. Provision of loans to countries experiencing balance of payment problem.

14. Increasing the global supply of international reserves.

12.9.3 Mode of operation

The IMF provides loans to countries experiencing problem of balance of payment for restoration

and sustainable economic growth. The loans have come to be known as structural adjustment loans

because they aim to help borrowing governments adjust the structure of economic activity. The

loan is given specifically for the rebuilding of external reserves, currency stabilization and payment

for imports. Unlike development bank, IMF does not give loans for specific projects. Loans are

provided under special arrangement. Under the arrangement, letter of intent is passed by

application through executive board by the country seeking for loan.

Following the approval, loans are released in instalments. Concessional interest rate is give to

low-income countries through the poverty Reduction Growth facility (PRGF). However, the non-

concessional loan is given through five facilities and the interest rates are subject to IMF related

201
interest rate known as rate of charge which is currently 2.9%. The five facilities namely:

1. Stand By Arrangements (SBA).

2. Extended Fund Facility (EFF)

3. Supplementary Reserve Facility (SRE)

4. Contingent Credit Loans (CCL)

5. Compensatory Financing Facility (CFF)

12.9.4 Objectives of the IMF

✓ To promote international monetary co-operations and the expansion of international trade.

✓ To contribute to the development of the productive resources of all members.

✓ To assist developing nations pay their trade partners in foreign currencies.

✓ To standardize currencies by ensuring currency stability and preventing disloyal

competition by depression of the rate of exchange.

✓ In order to encourage international trade, IMF ensures that· member countries’ currencies

are freely convertible.

✓ To give advice and help member nations solve their domestic economic problems.

✓ To serve as a clearinghouse for member nations where inter-nation indebtedness could

easily be settled.

Describe two features of the IMF.

Promoting global monetary and exchange stability, and encouraging economic growth.

Summary of Study Session 12

In this study session you have learnt:

1) what international trade is and the reasons for international trade.

202
2) the advantages and disadvantages of international trade as well as barrier to international

trade were also examined.

3) furthermore, the documents used in international trade and the means of payment in foreign

trade were discussed. Globalization as a term was defined.

4) the advantages and disadvantages and features of the world that aid globalization were also

considered.

5) the regional economic integration is an agreement between neighbouring nations to allow

for the free flow of ideas, investment funds, technology, goods and services and the free

movement of persons within the region for the benefit of comparative advantage and

economies of scale. The various economic unions like the General Agreement on Trade

and Tariffs (GATT), World Trade Organization (WTO), International Monetary Fund

(IMF), and the World Bank among others were discussed. The features of each of this

integration or economic unions were discussed.

Self-Assessment Questions (SAQs) for Study Session 12


Now that you have studied this session, you can assess how well you have achieved its learnig

outcomes by answering the following questions. Write your answers in your study diary and

discuss them with your facilitator at the next study centre meeting. You can check your answers

at the end of this course material.

SAQ 12.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.1 and 12.4)


Briefly discuss five objectives of the international monetary funds
SAQ 12.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.3)
Discuss three advantages and disadvantages each of globalization.
SAQ 12.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.4)
Outline five groups of the World Bank and state their function
SAQ 12.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.2)
List and explain briefly four documents used in international trade.

203
SAQ 12.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.5)
State two each of the reasons and problems of regional economic integration

Multiple Choice Questions


Choose from the alternatives the option that best suit the question.
1. .......... is the trade between individual firms and government of the countries.
(a) Regional Trade
(b) Internal Trade
(c) International Trade
(d) World Trade

2. The manufacturer or supplier document that shows that they have inspected the goods
shipped and they are in conformity with buyer‘s purchase order.
(a) An Indent
(b) Consular Invoice
(c) Certificate of Inspection
(d) Bill of lading.

3. .......... is the integration of economies with regards to market for goods, factors of
production and technology?
(a) Globalization
(b) International Trade
(c) Internal trade
(d) All of the above

4. Globalization is the ________ and _______ across the world by entrepreneur


(a) Marketing, disinvestment
(b) Finance, consumption
(c) Trading, Selling
(d) None
5. The order which gives the details, about the types, and quality of goods required by the
buyer is called.........
(a) Indent
(b) Consular invoice
(c) Bill of lading
(d) Freight Note

6. One of these does not include the objectives of GATT.


(a) making optimal use of world’s resources to guarantee sustainable development.
(b) improving members’ market access
(c) encouraging restriction and distribution in agricultural market
(d) improving the standard of living and expansion of production and trade in goods and
services of member countries

7. One of the features of IMF is facilitating the expansion and balanced growth of international
trade for current transactions.
(a) True
(b) False
(c) None of the above

204
8. ECOWAS is made up of ------------------- member states
(a) 14
(b) 15
(c) 16
(d) 17

9. Which of the following is not the facility of granting non-concessional loan by


International Monetary Fund
(a). Stand By Arrangement
(b). Extended Fund Facility
(c). Contingent Credit Loans
(d). Poverty Reduction Growth facility

10. MIGA means


(a). Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency
(b). Multilateral Investment Growth Agency
(c). Multilateral Interest Growth Agency
(d). Multilateral Interest Guarantee Agency

Links to OERs
business ethics Archives - BusinessOER.com

http://www.businessdictionary.com/searchterms.php?q=What+is+business#ixzz1lryKNdYR

References/Suggestions for Further readings

Adeyemi, S (2002). “Fostering regional Integration Through NEPAD Implementation:


Annual Report, 2002. Abuja ECOWAS.
http//www.sec.ecowas.int/sitecedeao/English/rapport/es annual report 2002pdf
Bhagwati, J (2004). In Defense of Globalization. New York: Oxford University Press.
Economic Community of West African States ECOWAS (2007) Information Manual: The
Institutions of the community ECOWAS.
Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS)(2011). In Encyclopædia
Britannica. Retrieved from http//www. Britannica.com/EBchecked/1778329/Economics-
Community- of- West African-States.
Ollila, E. (2005). Global health priorities – priorities of the wealthy? Globalization and
Health, vol. 1(6)

205
Guardian (1999) Globalisation and the future of African Development by Centre for
Advanced Social Science,. , June 16.
McAlister, E.(2005). "Globalization and the Religions Production of Space." Journal for
the Scientific Study of Religion, Vol. 44, No 3, September 2005, 249-255.
Scherer.J (2007). "Globalization, promotional culture and the production/consumption of online
games: Engaging Adidas's "Beat Rugby" campaign". New Media & Society 9: 475–496.
United Nations (1993). World Investment Report, New York; UNCTC.
World Bank World Debt Tables 1994 - 1995. Washington 1994. World Bank (1996):
Nigeria: Poverty in the Midst of Plenty: The Challenge of Growht with Inclusion.
Population and Human Resources Divison, Estern Africa Department, Africa
Region, World Bank.

Should you require more explanation on this study session, please do not hesitate to contact your e-tutor
via the LMS.

Are you in need of General Help as regards your studies? Do not hesitate to contact the DLI IAG Center
by e-mail or phone on:

iag@dli.unilag.edu.ng 08033366677

206
APPENDIX 1

SOLUTIONS TO SELF_ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS FOR


SESSIONS 1 to 12
Answers to all SAQs
Study Session 1
SAQ 1.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.3)
Give a brief account of the Nigerian economy and business

Nigeria runs a mixed economy which is an economic system that is in between a capitalist (free
market) economy and a socialist (pure planned) economy. This economic system means that the
government owns most of the means of production, e.g. land and capital, and also influences the
key economic variables like interest rate, exchange rate and the maintenance of sound financial
regulations. Government is also involved in direct supply of utilities like water, electricity, roads,
power, postal services, telecommunication, etc. These are vital economic institutions whose
activities are very basic to the total economic system. From the above, you can see that Nigeria,
the state and her agencies, as well as the private investors, are involved in the supply of goods and
services that meet the society’s needs.
The objective of the state engaging in business (both as commercially-oriented as well as socially-
oriented) obviously is to promote maximum welfare, freedom and happiness, as stated in the
constitution, while that of private business investors is to maximize profit. The effect of -
government objective is felt in the provision of essential services, infrastructural facilities, and
employment opportunities among others.

SAQ 1.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.5)


Write short notes of not more than three sentence each on the different categories or classification
of business.
Business can be classified according to the type of customers, type of goods produced and
industry characteristics.
d. Type of customers: This is simply talking about customers of a business who may either
be end-users or those who use the products to further their own production. The end users
are the final consumers, while those who use the product to further their own production
explain the case where the output of one business becomes the input of another. In a
situation where an output is used as input by the other, the good is an intermediate/industrial

207
goods producer while the other whose product goes to the end-users are called consumer
goods producers.
e. Type of Goods Produced: In this instance, business can be classified according to the kind
of goods produced. Some goods produced can be termed durable or specialty goods, e.g.
machines, electrical appliances, motor vehicles, aeroplanes. Other goods can be considered
non-durable or convenience goods because they are consumed within a short period of time.
f. Industry Type: This is a situation where business is classified using its industry
characteristics. For instance we have the extractive industry, Manufacturing industry,
Construction industry, commercial industry and the service industry.

SAQ 1.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.4)


Outline and illustrate the economic foundations of business

Economic foundation of business is based on the study of the distribution of factors of production
or resources (human and material, and natural) for the production of goods and services within a
social system. There are various economic systems and they differ in the handling of the
distribution of resources even though they all must address the crucial issues of what goods and
services to be produced, and how much of each will satisfy consumers’ needs? How are goods and
services to be produced, who will produce them, and with what resources will they be produced?
And how are the goods and services to be distributed to the consumers?
The three types of economic systems mostly found in the world today are Communism, Socialism,
and Capitalism.
Communism: In this type of economy, the people (through the government) own and operate all
business and factors of production. Central government planning determines what goods and
services satisfy citizens’ needs, how the goods and services are produced, and how they are
distributed. This system was previously practiced in Russia, Poland, Hungary, and other Eastern
European nations.
Socialism is an economic system in which the government owns and operates basic industries such
as postal service, telephone, utilities, transportation, health care, banking, and some manufacturing,
but individuals own most businesses. Central planning determines what basic goods and services
are produced, how they are produced, and how they are distributed. Individuals and small
businesses provide other goods and services based on consumer demand and the availability of
resources. Here also citizens are dependent on the government for many goods and services.
Examples of socialist nations are Sweden, India, and Israel.

208
Capitalism or free enterprise is an economic system in which individuals own and operate the
majority of businesses that provide goods and services. Competition, supply, and demand
determine which goods and services are produced, how they are produced, and how they are
distributed. The United States, Canada, Japan, and Australia are examples of economic systems
based on capitalism. There are two forms of capitalism: pure capitalism and modified capitalism.
In pure capitalism also called a free-market system, all economic decisions are made without
government intervention. On the other hand, modified capitalism states that the government
intervenes and regulates business to some extent. One way of doing this is through enactment of
laws and policies on the economy. This can be viewed as what is referred to in today’s world as
the Mixed Economies.

SAQ 1.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.1 and 1.2)


Define Business and state the purpose of business
Business has been defined differently by various scholars. Some described business as “an
organization consisting of a person or a group of persons who produce and distribute goods and
services for private profit”. It has also been viewed as an economic system in which goods and
services are exchanged for one another or money, on the basis of their perceived worth. However,
Karimu (1992) defines Business as “the sum of all the activities involved in the creation and
distribution of goods and services for private profit”. It is also conceived as a legally recognized
organization. Business is therefore any legal means of satisfying human wants with the motive of
profit.
The purpose for business is different to the very many operators. The major reason for business is
the supply of goods and services in order to satisfy the societal needs. Needs, whether
physiological, psychological security, social/belongingness, esteem or self-actualization is
expected will be provided by the institutions best suited to provide them. The motives for
satisfying needs by the various institutions differ. For instance the church is spiritually motivated;
government is politically motivated, while business is profit-motivated.
Answers to MCQs in Study session 1
Study Session 1
Questions 1 2 3 4 5
Answers C A D B D

Study Session 2
SAQ 2.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.4)
In three sentences distinguish between internal and external environment
The internal environment is termed the controllable environment while the external environment

209
is seen as uncontrollable.
The internal environment of business is made up of micro-environmental factors such as
organizational goals and objectives, specific technologies utilized by component units of the
organization, the size, types and quality of personnel, its administrative units, and the nature of
the organization’s product/service, while the external environment is subdivided into Macro and
Micro Environment with the macro environment regarded as the general environment with
factors such as political, economic, social and technological while the micro environment is
regarded as the specific or task environment having factors such as customers, suppliers,
competitors etc.
The internal environment of business is made up of all the physical and social factors within the
confine of the business, which impart strengths or cause weaknesses of a strategic nature and are
taken directly into consideration in the decision-making behaviour of the business; while external
environments is made up of factors that may spell profound threats or new opportunities for a
business.

SAQ 2.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.5)


Give four reasons why it is important for a manager to understand the environment of business.
It is important for a manager to understand the business environment for the following reasons:
 The viability or survival of business is determined by the environment, so business ought
to follow and be abreast of developments and changes in its environment and respond
appropriately in order to survive.

 The availability of all key inputs like skilled labour, trained managers, raw materials,
electricity, transportation, among others are a factor of the business environment.
 There is constantly increasing public awareness of the negative aspects of certain
industries like those manufacturing pesticides (damage to environment in the form of
chemical residues in groundwater), and plastic bags (choking of sewer lines), so a
business should know when its production process is causing negative effect to the public.
 The cost of capital and the cost of borrowing being two key financial drivers of any
enterprise are impacted by the external environment. Therefore the ability of a business
to fund its expansion or diversification plan will depend on a true knowledge of what is
happening within this sector.

SAQ 2.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.2 and 1.3)


Define business environment and state the components of the environment
The business environment is simply the surroundings within which a business exists. Business
environment embraces all institutions, organisations and individuals whose activities have an
impact directly or indirectly on business behaviour. Business environment differs from state to

210
state, region to region, and country to country. Some environment may be favourable while others
may be hostile.
The components of a business environment are the factors which affect the business. These
factors have been divided into internal and external factors. The internal factors are regarded as
micro-organisational (physical and social) factors which are deemed controllable at least within a
short run. The external factors constitute the macro and micro factors outside of the organisations
control which are seen as uncontrollable factors.

SAQ 2.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 1.6)


What are the characteristics of business environment? List and explain the four characteristics
Dynamism: The business environment is dynamic and not static. It is dynamic in the sense that it
changes continuously due to the interactions of the various factors that make up the business
environment.
Complexity: The business environment is complex and not simple. It is complex by virtue of the
various components that comprise it and the interrelationships among these factors.
Multifaceted: The business environment has many sides. It can be viewed from many angles by
the parties involved. So, an occurrence that may be viewed as strength by one organization may
be perceived as a weakness by another.
Far-reaching impact: The happenings in the business environment can have far-reaching or great
impact on the organization. It could have the ripple effect because business operating as an open
system is made up of different components that interact and interrelate with one another.
Therefore, any problem or development with one aspect may have enormous effect on the others.

Answers to MCQs in Study session 2


Study Session 2
Questions 1 2 3 4 5
Answers B B B A C

Study Session 3

SAQ 3.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.3)


Briefly explain with the aid of a diagram the relationship between business and its external
environment.

From the diagram below, the relationship between business and its external environment is
symbiotic. The aim of business is to provide goods and services to the society in order to make
profit and also satisfy other stakeholders. Business gives to its environment through identifying

211
customers need and also working towards providing customer satisfaction bearing in mind the
changing opportunities or threats that might come its way through new technologies or changing
social environment, or regulatory authorities or changing economic indices. The activities of
competitors or even the business suppliers and middlemen or distributors also make an input into
business activities.

SAQ 3.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.4)


What is environmental analysis? List and explain the various stages of environmental
Analysis

Environmental analysis is the study of the organizational environment to pin point environmental
factors that can significantly influence organizational operations. It involves thorough preliminary
analysis of the environmental problems, impact and performance, in relationship to the activities
of an organization.

The various stages of environmental analysis involve;


Identifying those factors that affect the business. This is the first step in analysing the environment. This
needs to be done at various internal levels, the company level, the regional level, the domestic level and
the global level. Several frameworks exist that can help this step of identification like SWOT and PEST.
These are merely tools that remind the identifier to consider certain types of factors.
Scanning for qualitative factors that have already been identified. That is, trying to distinguish which of
the identified factors have the most effect or significance on the business as not all of the factors identified
in the first step will have same weight.
Analyzing the effect the relevant environmental variables have on different levels of the business,
including the business at large will be the third step. This will involve brainstorming, reviewing historical
data, pulling departmental heads and managers’ so as to collect information that may assist in the
statistical analysis. The Types of analysis include mean, mode, correlation and regression, among others.
Forecasting being the fourth step becomes necessary once the environmental variables have been
identified, deemed significant, and analysed. This is in order to determine the effect that the said variables
would have in the future on the business. It mainly involves the analysis of current and historical data or
by examining the trend of things. By looking at the trend each significant environmental variable is
forecasted and a strategic report created, from which management can develop a business strategy in
response to the situation.

212
SAQ 3.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.2)
Identify the participants within the business environment?

Participants within the business environment are those whose activity affects the business
operation in one way or another or the environment of business. These include:
▪ The state which regulates the economy as well as consume the goods and services.
▪ Individuals i.e. consumers of goods and services, employees or labour in the organisations,
entrepreneur or providers of capital.
▪ Business organisations i.e. competitors, primary suppliers of inputs and services used for
production, distribution and retailing of the goods and services.

SAQ 3.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 3.5)


State briefly the purposes of environmental analysis and areas of
uncertainty in business.
Environmental analysis is done for the following purposes:
It will help the management to understand what is happening both inside and outside the
organization.
It helps the organization to identify opportunities early and at the same time exploit them instead
of losing them to competitors.
It helps management identify threats and early warning signals. The entry of a new company into
a market usually sends a signal to others in that market and this most often brings about
improvement in the quality of their products, and aggressive advertising etc.
It improves performance. An organization that continuously monitors its environment and adopts
suitable business practices will not only improve its present performance but also continue to
succeed in the environment.
It helps the organization to cope with rapid changes in the environment.
Environmental uncertainty in business relates to the fact that it is very difficult to predict future
happenings, especially when environmental changes are taking place too frequently. For instance
we could have a change in taste of consumers, change in technology or even in research and
development. These areas are largely uncertain.
Answers to MCQs in Study session 3
Study Session 3
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Anws C A A A B C B B D D C

Study Session 4
SAQ 4.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.2)
What is Sole Proprietorship? State two advantages and two source of income for a sole proprietor.
Sole proprietorship is a type of business that is wholly owned by one person. The business belongs
to just one owner who has no partners or any other shareholder and is liable for the entire firm’s
obligations as he bears all the costs and keeps all the profits. The company may or may not be
registered with regulatory authority - Corporate Affairs Commission (CAC).

Two advantages are that in Sole proprietorship capital requirement is small, and there are no
strict regulations governing the establishment of a sole proprietorship.

213
The sole proprietor can obtain his capital or source his income from the following:
Personal savings
Loans from friends, cooperative societies etc

SAQ 4.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.3)


Enumerate and discuss three types of partnership. State two each of the advantages and disadvantages and
sources of income for a partnership.
There are different types of partnership arrangements. Three types are listed below:
Limited Partnership
This type of partnership is formed and registered under the Limited Partnership Act. Here, there
must be one general partner with unlimited liability and one partner with limited liability to the
amount invested. The limited partners cannot take equal part in management and administration
of the business but can have access to the account of the partnership.

General (Ordinary) Partnership


In this type of partnership, partners have equal responsibilities and risks in the business. All
partners are agents of the firm and they share the responsibility of running the business. Hence
they are liable to the full extent of the debts of the firm. The liability of members is unlimited.
Nominal (Quasi) Partnership
This is a type of partnership where a nominal partner contributes only his name to the formation
of the business. He neither contributes capital nor takes part in the management of the firm. A
nominal partner must be a distinguished personality within the society as his name must surely
increase the reputation and possibly the goodwill of the partnership business. A nominal partner
would share in the profits and or debts of the firm as specified in the Partnership Act of 1980.
The following advantages exist for a partnership:
Partnership unlike sole proprietorship may enjoy sufficient capital or generate adequate capital
because it involves more persons who can provide more sources of funds for the business.
Secondly, the sharing of risks and liabilities reduces individual burdens.

Its disadvantages may be limited growth potentials depending on the managerial abilities of the
partners and the risk of dissolution of the business through death, insanity or bankruptcy

Source of Income could be through personal contributions from partners, either equally or in
agreed proportion; and through loans and overdrafts.

SAQ 4.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.5)


Give two distinguishing features each of Cooperative Societies and Public Corporations?

Differences between Public Corporation and Cooperative Societies

Features Public Corporation Cooperative Societies


1. Ownership The government Owned by people of common interest
2. Objective Provision of essential services Promote and advance the interest of of
members by rendering services to them.

214
SAQ 4.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.5)
Give three features each of public liability company and public corporation
Features of Public Limited Liability Company
i. Ownership – minimum of 2 and an unlimited maximum number of shareholders.

ii. Formation – special formalities must be followed before registration. Incorporation is


secured by filing the Article of Association and Memorandum of Association with the
registrar of companies.

iii. Preparation of Annual Accounts which must be audited and published annually

Features of public corporation


1. Ownership – owned and financed by the government.
2. Establishment – established by Act of Parliament or Decree.
3. Objective – to provide essential services to the generality of the people.

SAQ 4.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.4)


How is a private limited liability company different from a public liability company? Give three
differences and two sources of their income.
The difference between Private and Public Limited Liability Companies are shown in this table.

Private Limited Liability Company Public Limited Liability Company


1. Shares are not easily transferable, except with Shares are easily transferable
the consent of other members
2. Uses Ltd after the name of the company. Uses ‘Plc’ after the name of the company
3. Has a maximum number of 50 owners There is no limit on the maximum number of
owners
Sources of finance for a private limited liability company
1. Loans and overdrafts from banks
2. Shares raised by shareholders

Sources of finance for public limited liability company


1. Loans and overdrafts
2. Sales of shares

SAQ 4.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 4.6)


State three advantages and disadvantages each of private and public liability company.
Advantages of private limited liability company
1. Has legal entity – can sue or be sued
2. Shareholders have limited liability
3. Continuity of existence

215
Disadvantages of private limited liability company
1. Shares are not sold to public which acts as a limitation for expansion
2. Shares are not easily transferable
3. Payment of corporate tax

Advantages of public limited liability company


1. Legal entity
2. Transferability of shares
3. Owners are separated from management

Disadvantages of public limited liability company


1. Lack of privacy
2. Slow decision making process
3. Large capital requirement

Answer to MCQ Study session 4

Questions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answers A A D A B C B B A A

Study Session 5

SAQ 5.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 )


Define entrepreneur and state five characteristics of a successful entrepreneur

An entrepreneur is a person who develops a new idea and takes the risk of setting up an enterprise
to produce a product or service which satisfies customer needs. He is “one who undertakes an
enterprise especially a commercial one, often at a personal financial risk”.
The entrepreneur is a business person who is not satisfied with his/her performance and therefore
always finds ways to improve and grow. An entrepreneur is one of the key factors of production
as seen by economists and brings together other factors of production such as land, money,
materials, manpower and methods to produce goods and services. All entrepreneurs are business
persons, but not all business persons are entrepreneurs. An entrepreneur could be an inventor or
innovator or both, an inventor when he invents a new product unknown in the history of man or
within his environment, an innovator when he adapts an existing invention to solve a peculiar need.

Successful entrepreneur possesses the following characteristics.


1) High need for achievement

216
2) Very optimistic and passionate about what they do,
3) Very dynamic and flexible in outlook,
4) Very innovative,
5) Very courageous.

SAQ 5.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.2)


In not more than two sentences differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship is the capacity and attitude of a person or group of persons to undertake ventures
with the probability of success or failures and demands that the individual should be prepared to
assume a reasonable degree of risks, be a good leader in addition to being highly innovative; while
an entrepreneur is the actual person who develops a new idea and takes the risk of setting up an
enterprise to produce a product or service which satisfies customer needs.
Entrepreneurship is an attempt at creating value through recognition of business opportunities,
management of risk-taking appropriate to the opportunities, and through the communicative and
management skills to mobilize human, financial and material resources necessary to bring a project
to fruition; while an entrepreneur is one who is the risk bearer, has the capacity economically to
produce goods and services; organizes and supervises production; and introduces new methods and
new products, and searches for new materials.

SAQ 5.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.5)


List and explain four success nuggets for entrepreneurs

Four success nuggets for entrepreneurs are as follows:

An entrepreneur must have Need for a vision: You must understand what potentials, gifts and
talents God has given you. These are things you think you are capable of doing and doing very
well. The vision should be written on your heart and you meditate on it at all times. Do not go into
a business simply because it is the one that is in vogue. Start a business in which you have a keen
interest; you can only have an enduring success in a business that gives you personal satisfaction.
Need for effective planning: There is no substitute to effective planning. To achieve a lot within
the time available, organize your work, plan your time, have time schedule for your work, state
what you will achieve per day, per week, per month, per year. Make a habit of ticking through what
you have achieved each day.
Need for discipline: Have a purpose and goal. Be determined to follow your plan through. Stick
to your goal despite setbacks and challenges. Discipline yourself as to the use of time and financial
resources. Organise yourself, work and plan your time. Have a time schedule for what you will
like to achieve per period and avoid time-wasters like too much time spent on telephone
conversations, unwanted visitors, unplanned social engagements, etc.
Need to endure initial hardships: You should know that visions are not achieved overnight. It is
a long term thing. Do not be in a hurry. Try and endure the initial hardships. Anything of a lasting
value would usually have a gestation period – a waiting period, a time lag between sowing and
reaping.

217
SAQ 5.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 5.4)
Write short notes of not more than three sentence each on the early and modern stages of
entrepreneurship development.

The Early Stage of entrepreneurship started when people produced more products than they needed, so
they had to exchange (trade by barter) these surpluses. Even before the advent of any form of money,
producers came to realize that they could concentrate in their areas of strength to produce more and then
exchange with what they needed and through this exchange of products, entrepreneurship started.
People of the Ibo community in Nigeria are considered one of the oldest entrepreneurs in history, their
expertise stretching back to times before modern currency and trade models had developed elsewhere on
the planet
The Modern Stage: Modern entrepreneurship in Nigeria started with the coming of the colonial masters
who brought in their wares and made Nigerians their middle men. In this way, modern entrepreneurship
was conceived. Most of the modern entrepreneurs were engaged in retail trade or sole proprietorship.
Answer to MCQ Study Session 5
Questions 1 2 3 4 5
Answers D C A D B

Study Session 6
SAQ 6.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, and 6.2)
Discuss briefly the four organic functions of business.

The four organic functions of business include marketing, production, finance and human
resources.
The Marketing function involves the identification of consumer needs which initiates the
business cycle. Market research is the tool used for identifying and assessing consumer needs.
The function of the marketing department is to engage in Market research which involves
gathering, recording and analyzing facts and data concerned with the market. The market
research will take care of such questions as
g) What can be sold in a given market?
h) Where can they be sold?
i) Who are the buyers?
j) What quantity can they buy?
k) What price can they pay?
l) Where can they get the product?

These questions must be answered before the product can be developed and for the business to succeed.
Hence, the marketing function embraces a wide range of sub-functions requiring special skills such
as product planning, public relations, sales and physical distribution, product advertising, and
product promotion.

Production being the process of converting raw materials into finished products means that the
function of the Production department is relating the output of a firm to the amount of inputs.
The production function includes stating the amount of product that can be obtained from every
combination of factors, assuming that the most efficient available methods of production are
used. It can, for example, measure the marginal productivity of a particular factor of production
(i.e., the change in output from one additional unit of that factor). It can also be used to determine
the cheapest combination of productive factors that can be used to produce a given output. The

218
production department can use either or a combination of the types of production. The types of
production systems are Job Shop Production, Batch production, Mass production and Process
production.
The basic objective of the finance function is to formulate policies ensuring that the most
effective use is made of the financial resources of the organization. It assists the company to
make use of the funds at its disposal and to select the most favourable sources of additional funds
to finance future operations.
Accounting provides the source of information for financial analysis and planning. Accountants
measure such variables as performance, sales expenses, profits, assets and liabilities and express
their findings in numerical terms. This is then communicated to individuals, management and all
interested parties both in and outside the enterprise.
Financial Accounting is part of the finance function. It takes care of preparing the company’s
balance sheet, profit and loss account and the manufacturing accounts in the case of
manufacturing companies.
The Human Resources Function (HR) deals with people at work and their relationship within
the working environment. The Human Resources approach further deals with the employee’s
entire working life in the company, and not just their contractual relationship with it. It is also
involved with values and aims of their commitment to management goals.
The HR function (Personnel Management and Industrial Relations) is a critical function
performed in any organization of human effort. Plants, office computers and machines are
unproductive except for human effort and direction. Managing the human component is the
central and most important part because everything depends upon how well it is done.
Human Resources function involves:
• Recruitment and Selection,
• Training and Retraining,
• Remuneration of employees,
• Formulating of personnel policies and procedures,
• Acting as a clearing house for information about employee’s conducts, attitude towards
management, the job and the firm,
• Assisting line managers with employee problems e.g. promotions, transfers, demotions,
discharges, etc
• Prepare job analysis and evaluation for each position in the firm, and
• Collective bargaining negotiation

SAQ 6.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, 6.2, and 6.3)


The marketing function embraces a wide range of sub-functions requiring special skills. State
three of such sub-functions

Three of the sub-functions of the marketing function include: Sales and physical distribution,
product promotion and Advertisement.
Sales and physical distribution sub-function ensures that customers are attracted and retained,
and that goods and services reach the ultimate users of the product. In many companies, sales and
distribution are a joint operation. However, before any distribution can take place, a selling
process has to be evolved. The sales department requires an imaginative or creative centre based
on the marketing plan.
Product Promotion is an act of showcasing a good or service manufactured by a firm with the
sole aim of increasing sales within the short or long run. Companies use different techniques and

219
communication mediums to promote their products.

Advertisement is an act of showcasing goods or services via TV, Radio, Newspaper or use of
bill boards. In the recent time, many companies have been trying to make use of online social
media to promote their product.
SAQ 6.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.1, 6.2, and 6.3)
List the four subdivision of the production function.

Depending on the organization, the production function can be subdivided into: Production
Administration, Production Design, Production Management and Production Ancillaries.

SAQ 6.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.4 and 6.5)


What are the basic contents of a feasibility study? Itemize and write short notes on at least three
using not more than two sentences each.

• Brief Description of the Project and its Objective


• Ownership
• The Product or Service
• Production Process and Production Plan
• The Market for the Product
• The Marketing Plan/Strategy
• Technical Feasibility
• Land/Property
• Organization and Management
• Economic or Financial Feasibility

Brief Description of the Project and its Objective


Describing the project and its objective briefly entails stating the name of the business, the type of
business (partnership, sole proprietorship, Limited Liability Company, etc) and the industry to
which the business belongs e.g. food and beverage industry, agricultural industry, textile and
clothing industry, banking industry among others.

Ownership
It is expected that you provide the name(s) of the promoters or proprietors of the business, their
origin (whether indigenes or foreigners), their business experience, what they do currently, their
skills and ability. This element will also include the ownership structure in case more than one
person owns the organisation.

The Product or Service


This entails describing the product or service you want to deliver to the consumers and the nature
of the product or service. You need to state whether it is a consumer good or an industrial good,
whether it is an intermediate or final product, the uses of the product or its importance to the
consumer, and the particular segment of the market it will serve.

SAQ 6.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 6.5)


State briefly the contents of a financial statement in a feasibility study

220
The contents of a financial statement require stating the estimated total capital needs or
requirements which is divided into capital expenditure & working capitals. Capital expenditure
takes care of capital items like plant and machinery, land and building, tools, office furniture and
fixtures, motor vehicles, etc. The working capital or start up capital which is the anticipated
expenditure before revenues are realized will also be stated. This includes anticipated payment for
labour (wages and salaries), utilities, rent, suppliers, repairs, raw materials, administration
expenses, production overhead and other expenses at the initiation of business. Financial feasibility
also entails making financial projections and profitability analysis, that is, having a budget of the
estimated expected costs and revenue or returns and stating the profit margin and expected net
profit.

Answer to MCQ Study Session 6

Question 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Study
Answer D B B C C A A D A B Session
7

SAQ 7.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.1 and 7.2)


Briefly explain the following concepts, challenges, business and management

Challenges are defined as the test of the abilities of a person, or thing. So, anything or act which
poses some difficulties and tests one’s ability to achieving success could be seen as challenging.
Normally things we are used to doing, no longer tests our abilities because it is established that we
can do it. Therefore we could further say that challenges are obstacles, obstructions, difficulties,
opposition, hindrances, hurdles that business people face.

Business as a word has also been defined in various ways by various people. Some view it “As an
organisation set up to make profit”; others describe it as “an organization consisting of a person or
a group of persons who produce and distribute goods and services for profit”. Business therefore
is “the sum of all the legal activities involved in the creation and distribution of goods and services
for private profit”. Therefore, business is any legal means of satisfying human wants with the
motive of profit.

Management means different things to different people depending on its usage. Some refer to it
as “Those at the top level of an organisation”, that is, the decision makers in an organisation.
Management is the process of planning, organizing, influencing, and controlling to accomplish
organisational goals through the coordinated use of human and material resources. Management
can then be visualised from two perspectives – people at the top level/decision makers (managers)
who ensure that organizational objectives are achieved through the efforts of people (workers) and
other relevant resources.

SAQ 7.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.3)


List and discuss five of the external factors affecting business operation in Nigeria
Five of the external factors affecting business operation in Nigeria include: Unstable Government
Policy, Poor infrastructure, Irregular Power Supply, Inflation/High Cost of doing business, and
Low level of Savings/Spending.
Unstable Government Policy: Government policies are often unstable and inconsistent especially
in the past as a result of political instability. This affects planning and decision making. Examples
are policies on import and export, fiscal and monetary policies, policies on licensing, monopolies,

221
foreign investment, distribution and pricing and their controlling, customer protection policies, etc.

Poor Infrastructure: Facilities such as roads, rail, air transport, schools, health facilities, water,
etc, if not in good shape will affect everyone whether a business person or not. As for business
people, bad roads, deficient rail or air system, lack of usable or portable water will affect the cost
of doing business. Bad roads for instance, will cause heavy traffic jams thereby increasing the
number of hours spent in going for a business deal as well as put the vehicles under stress and
thereby reducing the life span of vehicles.

Irregular Power Supply: Most businesses currently operate on generator almost twenty-four
hours daily. Business has to cope with the cost of purchasing generator, powering with the
appropriate petroleum product (cost of products unstable), servicing and maintaining it, and of
course repairing when it is faulty. All of these will add to the cost of the final product or service
to the end users.

Inflation/High Cost of Doing Business: Inflation is the pervasive and sustained rise in the
aggregate level of prices measured by an index of the cost of various goods and services.
Repetitive price increases erode the purchasing power of money and other financial assets with
fixed values, creating serious economic distortions and uncertainty.

Low level of Savings/Spending: Economic growth is slow even though government is working
through the National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS) to stimulate
growth. Price levels are high and people only spend on essential goods and services (food, shelter,
clothing, education etc.); therefore, little or nothing is reserved for savings. The level of savings
and spending is low and this is not good enough for business especially those who are into some
of the goods and services considered not-too-essential for human survival.

SAQ 7.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.2)


Define challenges of business management as a phrase

Challenges of Business Management are those issues, factors, conditions, situations,


uncertainties which test the abilities of business managers as they work towards satisfying human
wants and in return make profit.

SAQ 7.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 7.2)


Define challenges of business management as a phrase

Challenges of Business Management are those issues, factors, conditions, situations,


uncertainties which test the abilities of business managers as they work towards satisfying human
wants and in return make profit.

Answer to MCQ for Study session 7

222
Questions 1 2 3 4 5
Answers D C C A C

Study Session 8
SAQ 8.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.1 and 8.2)
Define Strengths, weakness, opportunities and threats

Strengths are the ability of an organisation, resources, and weaknesses of the competitor or the
opposition. The internal strengths include a company’s core competencies, corporate capabilities
and resources that provide the basis for strategy, e.g. workforce, decision making process,
flexible board, good working environment, and financial capability.
The weakness of an organisation is its failures, defeats (what other people do better than you),
losses and inability to match up with the dynamic situation of the growth of change. This
includes the critical parts of your business you must strengthen or hide from your competitors.
Opportunities are possibilities of what can be done and where effectiveness is possible, the
benefits that are likely to accrue from pursuing your vision.
Threats are changes in business environment usually in the PEST forces which are pitfalls,
dangers, variation and exceptions that are present in an environment.

SAQ 8.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.3)


What are the indicators of unmet needs? State five indicators

The indicators of unmet needs are some of the situations or event which point to the fact that there
are gaps which can be filled by a business if all criteria to filling it are met. These indicators are
stated below:

8. Poor delivery of products/services:- If there are complaints and visible problems faced
by customers, one can see it as an opportunity and come up with better method of delivering
such products/services. E.g. in the past, letters, parcels, etc, were handled by NIPOST, but
the courier companies saw the visible complaints and dissatisfaction in customers and today
have taken over the market from NIPOST.

9. Dissonance (lack of Agreement in beliefs) with current means of satisfying existing


needs: If people’s expectations are not met in certain products or services, dissatisfaction
sets in. For instance, when it became obvious that our public or government schools were
no longer meeting the expectations of the populace, the private schools came in. Nigerian
Airways with its abysmal service paved way for private airline operators.

10. Emergent Needs: These are needs in the early stages of development. Every need at a
point in time was emergent. Tapping into this opportunity has so much to do with foresight.
Your ability to foresee a need to be met in the future, perhaps needs that may arise through
the use or availability of a current product. Nigeria for instance has need for
storage/preservation of our fruits and vegetables especially because they are mostly
seasonal produce. This is a gap identified.

11. Technological Changes: The issue of technology is dynamic and requires an innovative
entrepreneur who is constantly thinking of how to improve an existing technology to suit

223
customers. This way he may find it as a business opportunity to launch the better technology
which customers or users may prefer to the existing one. For instance, it took an innovative
and ingenious business men to realize that grinding of tomatoes, pepper, pounding of yam,
etc. which hitherto was done manually through the use of mortar could get a better result
using machines (Blender, Poundo machine). A gap existed there because some career
women have little or no time to pound and a machine was just apt.

12. Envisaged Large Market: When the users of a product are many such that those serving
the market may not be doing that effectively, other business men could go into that market,
since it is large enough to accommodate all. For instance most of the Igbo traders that bring
in radio face the northern market knowing that this group of people especially the lower
status like listening to the radio a lot.

SAQ 8.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.6)


List and explain five micro causes of business failure

Five micro causes of business failure include:


i. Poor business planning/financial decisions.
ii. Inadequate capital before commencement of business
iii. Bad management
iv. Cash flow problems: you spend more than you receive
v. Fall in demand for the product

SAQ 8.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.5)


Identify three institutionalized sources of business ideas

Three institutionalized sources of business ideas are: Universities and Research Institutes,
Consulting Firms/Market researchers, and Industrial and business publications.

Universities and Research Institutes: These are centres where students and consultants have done
a lot of research on new businesses and the reports have largely been left to waste. Examples are
Federal Institute of Industrial Research Oshodi (FIIRO), Project Development Agency (PRODA)
Enugu, and all other universities and research bodies.
Consulting Firms/Market Researchers: These are people who specialize in consulting and
researching for business people at a cost. They take the burden of researching for opportunities
from entrepreneur and business people at a fee.
Industrial and business publications: There are very vital information published by business
journals /magazines etc. This can help a searching mind to identify a business opportunity. For
instance, Business Day, Financial times, etc.

SAQ 8.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.4)


State three constraints to exploiting business opportunity

These are:

224
4) Economic Factors. These include, cost consideration (capital needed, level of competition
in the market, resource availability such as adequate skilled manpower and suitable material
resources, location and the size of the market.
5) Technical factors. Lack of technical know-how to provide such goods and services that
will satisfy customers. From some perspective people will jump at products that can prevent
baldness, loss of sight, death or sickness, but there is no technology to that effect yet.
6) Knowledge factors. This could be a constraint because the right knowledge to the
opportunity or gap may be missing.

SAQ 8.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 8.7)


Mention four strategies for business survival

1. Have adequate capital requirement


2. Engage in customs-made goods since large firms engage in mass production
3. Be innovative and ingenuous
4. Have an effective sales force

Answer to MCQ for Study Session 8


Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Anws C A A A B C B B D D C

Study Session 9
SAQ 9.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.1, 9.2 )
In two sentences define social responsibility

Social responsibility according to Schermerhorn (2002) is defined as an obligation of the


organization to act in ways that serve both its own interests and the interests of its many external
stakeholders. Social responsibility is therefore the obligation of organisations to protect and
improve the welfare of society as well as its own interest.

SAQ 9.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.3)


Compare three arguments for and against social responsibility

1. Arguments in favour of social responsibility opine that business is unavoidably


involved in social issues because it is an entity of society, allowed by society to exist and
if society does not exist, organisations will also not exist. Thus, when there is a change in
societal expectations about business, so should their actions change; while arguments
against thinks It is a subtle socialist idea Since it looked like an indirect way of using
political mechanism as opposed to market mechanisms, as the most appropriate means of
allocating scare resources.

225
2. Arguments in favour of social responsibility opines that corporate businesses have the
obligation and resources to help solve some of the problems facing the society, while
those who are against thinks that as an economic institution, business lacks the ability
to pursue social goals because business is not equipped to handle social matters.

3. Those in favour of social responsibility feel Organisations tap their natural, material
and human resources used for production from the environment (society), it therefore
behoves them to be socially responsible in return; while those against think that the Social
responsibility of business is to use its resources and engage in activities designed to
increase its profits. So long as it stays within the game, “competition without deception
or fraud”.

SAQ 9.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.5)


State the benefits accruing to a socially responsible organisation
The following benefits are likely to accrue to organizations practising social responsibility.
1. A better awareness of the organisation is created
2. Public opinion sways in favour of such organisation
3. There is increase in profit as more customers/public patronizes the organization
4. The organization is likely to attract socially conscious investors.

SAQ 9.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.6)


Define ethics and state at least three causes of ethical compromise and influence

Pearce and Robinson (2007) refer to ethics as the moral principles that reflect society’s beliefs
about the actions of an individual or a group that are right and wrong. Ethics are principles or
standards of human conduct, sometimes called morals (Latin ‘mores’ ‘customs’. Ethics are
“Moral rules or principles of behaviour for deciding what is right or wrong”.

There are several causes of ethical compromise. Some of these are:

 The pressure of competition can lead people to engage in unethical practices.


 When the judicial process is weak and people can get away with any type of crime
committed, then many more will be encouraged to go into unethical practices.
 What is considered a vice in one setting may be a value in another; and so people with
wrong sense of value and who engage in unethical practice do not see certain action as a
vice. For instance the wish to succeed by all means in a society that does not recognize
hard work as a means of success can make some business people to be unethical in their
behaviour.

SAQ 9.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.7)


Identify four ethical issues in business and two factors encouraging compliance to ethics

226
a. Conflict of Interest: In this context a worker allows his or her personal interest to override
the official obligation.
b. Honesty and Fairness: Where dishonesty and inequity becomes the norm in a business
organisation as they deal with the stakeholders.
c. Communications: Ethics demand that there should not be deceit or exaggerated claims in
any contact or communication with the public; instead vital facts that can assist third parties
to take decisions should be disclosed.
d. Respect in the Workplace: Business ethics emphasises the establishment of a work
environment in which all individuals are treated with respect and dignity. All forms of
discriminatory practices e.g. sexual harassment should be avoided. Employees on their own
should treat one another with respect.

Factors encouraging compliance to ethics may be:


vi. Manager’s personal value system
vii. Religious beliefs

SAQ 9.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.8)


Describe measures to ensure ethical practices are followed in the organisation
d) Code of ethics is written and not oral. This code should specify what is adduced to be right
or wrong within the organisation.
e) Information relating to ethical practice is not centred only on cost and profit
f) The establishment of specific job positions responsible for enforcing the ethical codes of
their organisation.
g) Top management act as strong role models for lower level personnel

SAQ 9.7 (tests Learning Outcomes 9.4)


List at least five stakeholders or interest groups in Social Responsibility
The five stakeholders or interest groups in social responsibility include:
Employees, Customers, Government, Shareholders and the community.

Study Session 10
SAQ 10.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.2)
Differentiate between regulatory and facilitating roles of government

The regulatory role of Government as the name connotes is all about regulation of the activities
of business. This is carried out through the agencies set up by the government. These agencies
exist at the Federal and State levels and they have responsibility over the legislation for different
sectors of the economy. For examples we have the Corporate Affairs Commission, Economic and

227
Financial Crime Commission (EFCC), Security and Exchange Commission (SEC), among others
who are all agencies of government carrying out regulatory roles.
The facilitating roles of government are meant to provide favourable business environment
which will be attractive to investors. This is also called Promotional role. Some of the ways the
roles are carried out are by providing tax and custom duties incentive to business institutions in
order to encourage them to develop and compete favourably with their foreign counterpart,
promoting free competition in the economy, amongst others.

SAQ 10.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.3)


Give four reasons for government control of business

Governments regulate and control business in order to:


vii. Maintain free competition
viii. Protect public health and safety i.e. the welfare of the people.
ix. Ensure adequate service at reasonable rates by businesses deemed essential to the public
welfare
x. Protect infant industries against dumping

SAQ 10.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.4)


State three objectives of the Nigerian Enterprises Promotion Decree (NEPD)

The following are the objectives of NEPD amongst others:


1. To create more employment for Nigerians.
2. To allow Nigerians have a larger say over the running of the economy.
3. To obviate foreign undue dominance and safeguard the best interests of the Nigerian
economy.

SAQ 10.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.5)


List two benefits of the NEPD

1. Increased local retention of profit.


2. A pool of indigenous personnel with better technical and management skills.

SAQ 10.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.6)


Write brief notes on schedules I and II of the decrees

Schedule One: The enterprises in this schedule were to be exclusively reserved for Nigerian
citizens and associations, provided the capitalization was less than N20 million. Foreigners were
free to invest in these enterprises provided their investment was more than N20 million. Some of
the items in schedule 1 are: Advertising, Public relation business, Assembling of radios, television,
Bottling of alcoholic drinks, Baking of cake and bread etc.

Schedule Two: The enterprises listed in this schedule are those in which Nigerians were expected
to have a majority ownership of at least 60 per cent. These include: Banking (commercial banks,
merchants banks and development banks), Basic iron and steel manufacturing, Beer brewing,
Clearing and forwarding agencies.

SAQ 10.6 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.7)


Outline at least three structural imbalances that led to SAP

228
Some of the structural imbalances that informed the introduction of the Structural Adjustment
Programme include:
• High levels of subsidies
• Bloated government expenditure/high budget deficits
• Poor agricultural prices

SAQ 10.7 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.8)


Itemize four requirements for a successful commercilization process

• The reduction or elimination of subvention to the enterprise


• Reduction to the barest minimum or elimination of political interference by the supervising
government ministry in the day to day running of the enterprise.
• Appointment of a reputable board of directors and commitment to sound corporate
governance principles.
• The appointment of a competent management team

SAQ 10.8 (tests Learning Outcomes 10.8)


Discuss two methods used by BPE to privatize firms in Nigeria

6. Concessioning. This is the approach that has been used to privatize Nigerian port terminals,
using the landlord model. Nigerian Ports Authority remains the owner and landlord, but the
port terminal assets have been given out to private terminal operators to operate for as long
as 25 years and in return they pay agreed sums to government for the use of the terminals.
They also commit themselves to invest in and develop the terminals for the period they will
control and operate them.

7. Core Investment Approach – used in selling large commercial enterprises like oil and gas
marketing companies, telecommunication and power companies, etc. This was the method
used by the Federal Government through the BPE to dispose of its investments in National
Oil and Chemical Company Ltd, where the core investor was Consolidated Oil Ltd (Con
Oil). Ltd and Unipetrol, where the core investor was Oando Ltd. Whenever a core investor
approach is used, it is assumed that the remaining shares are already in the hands of other
private investors as in the case of Unipetrol which was previously partly taken over by
government.

Answer to MCQ on study Session 10


Questions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answers A B C A B B B C A A

Study Session 11

SAQ 11.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.1, 11.2, and 11.3)


NEEDS focused on four key strategies. List them.

229
The four key areas NEEDS focused on were:

(1) reforming government and institutions


(2) growing the private sector
(3) implementing a social charter and
(4) reorienting the value system of the populace.

SAQ 11.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.2 and 11.3)


Outline seven critical areas that NEEDS sought to address.

• Health/HIV AIDS – reducing the huge disease burden and the HIV/AIDS pandemic
• Education – realizing that half of Nigeria’s population is young, the strategic role of education in
knowledge diffusion, skill building and human capital development
• Agriculture – recognizing the primacy of agriculture and giving farmers the necessary
tool, materials and finance they need to produce food in abundance, create wealth and
employment and transform the rural sector
• Pension Reform – putting in place a modern contributory pension scheme
• Infrastructure – bridging the huge infrastructural gap necessary for Nigeria’s
economic development and social transformation
• Promoting the Private Sector – as the engine of growth of the economy
• Political and Administrative Reform –changing the way government does business,
shrinking the size of the public sector and drastically reducing the high cost of
governance

SAQ 11.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.4)


Mention five principles on which NEPAD was founded and state two of its objectives.
• African ownership and leadership, as well as broad and deep participation by all sectors
of society;
• Good governance as a basic requirement for peace, sucurity and sustainable, political and
socio-economic development;
• Anchoring the redevelopment of the continent on the resources and resourcefulness of the
African people;
• Partnership between and amongst African peoples;
• Acceleration of regional and continental integration;

Two of NEPAD’s objectives are:


e) To place African countries, both individually and collectively on a path of sustainable
growth and development, and
f) To halt the marginalization of Africa in the globalization process and enhance its full and
beneficial integration into the global economy.

SAQ 11.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 11.5)


Explain two long-term potential benefits of AGOA to African Countries

• It is expected that AGOA will provide improved access to U.S. technical expertise, credit,
and markets; and
• Establish a high-level dialogue on trade and investment.

230
Answers to MCQ for Study Session 11

Question 1 2 3 4 5
Answer B B C A A

Study Session 12

SAQ 12.1 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.1 and 12.4)


Briefly discuss five objectives of the International Monetary Fund’s (IMF)

The objectives of IMF among others include:

1. To contribute to the development of the productive resources of all members.


2. To assist developing nations pay their trade partners in foreign currencies.
3. To standardize currencies by ensuring currency stability and preventing disloyal
competition by depression of the rate of exchange.
4. In order to encourage international trade, IMF ensures that· member countries’ currencies
are freely convertible.
5. To give advice and help member nations solve their domestic economic problems.

SAQ 12.2 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.3)


Discuss three advantages and disadvantages each of globalization.

Advantages of globalization include:

10. It permits countries to concentrate on the production of goods and services in which they
have comparative advantage.
11. It raises productivity and improves the living standard of the people through international
division of labour and efficient allocation of resources.
12. It makes a country to have access to a large volume and diversified sources of external
funds or finance.

Disadvantages of globalization include:


a. It leads to dumping of goods/products
b. It reduces the demand for the products of infant and local industries
c. It may result to unemployment due to capital flight.

SAQ 12.3 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.4)


Outline five groups of the World Bank and state their function
6. International Developing Agency (IDA). The group provides loan assistances to middle
income and poorer countries
7. International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD). The group also provides
loan assistances to middle income and poorer countries like the international developing
agency
8. International Finance and Cooperation (IFC). It promotes private sector investment, both
foreign and domestic services as an investor and broker between foreign investors, local
partners and government authorities.

231
9. Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA). It promotes foreign direct investment
by offering political risk assurance. It conveys direct benefits to host countries by
providing information on job creation and training for employers.
10. International Centre for settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). It offers opportunity
to new big investors entering new markets and government to provide enabling
environment. The group also creates effective and stable financial markets. There is also
the provision of facilities for the settlements by conciliation or arbitration of investment
dispute between investor and their host.

SAQ 12.4 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.2)


List and explain briefly four documents used in international trade.

Four documents used in International trade are:

Sanitary Health Certificate: The certificate certifies that the product or goods
is fit for human consumption.
Certificate of Inspection: the manufacturer or supplier issues the certificate to show that they
have inspected the goods shipped and they are in conformity with buyer‘s purchase order.
The pro-forma invoice contains the particulars of exporter and importers.
Form M: the importer fills a set of the form by transferring the information on the pro-forma
invoice into the form M. Thereafter, the form M and the pro-forma invoice are sent to the
importer’s bank for processing.

SAQ 12.5 (tests Learning Outcomes 12.5)


State two each of the reasons and problems of regional economic integration
The reasons for regional economic integration are:
• Removal of all impediments to free trade and investments.
• Efficient resource allocation to promote greater output of goods and services and overall
economic well-being of member states.

The problems of regional economic integration are:

➢ Loss of some measure of economic and political independence by member states.


➢ Inability to fix tariffs and impose restriction not in line with the framework of the
integration agreement.
Answer to MCQ for Study Session 12

Question1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answer C C A D A C A C D A

232
APPENDIX 2

GLOSSARY OF KEYWORDS
Administrative Agency: There are specialized agencies such as NAFDAC and BON to control
types of economic activity.

Business- act of transacting goods and services

Business Development- act of expanding a business

Business Environment- is simply the surroundings within which a business exists. The business
environment embraces all institutions, organisations, and individuals whose activities have an
impact directly or indirectly on business behaviour.
Business management -act of overseeing transacting goods and services
Capitalism- under a capitalist economic system, individuals own all resources, both human and
non-human.
Capitalism: Under a capitalist economic system, individuals own all resources, both human and
non-human.
Challenges- the test of the abilities of a person, or thing. So, anything or act which poses some
difficulties and tests one’s ability to achieve success could be seen as challenging.
Charter: is the grant of authority or rights, stating that the granter formally recognizes the
prerogative of the recipient to exercise the right specified.
Commercial Industry: The activities engaged in these organizations serve as facilitators of
business. Examples are banks, insurance companies, wholesale and retail trade organizations, real
estate companies, transportation firms, etc.
Commercialization is the introduction of performance or efficiency-based principles in the
running of public or state-owned enterprises in a way that makes their operation self-sustaining
and better able to achieve the objectives for which they were established, without constituting a
drain on the public treasury.
Communications: Ethics demand that there should not be deceit or exaggerated claims in any
contact or communication with the public; instead, vital facts that can assist third parties to take
decisions should be disclosed.
Communism- Under this system, all resources, both human and non-human are owned by the
state.
Compliance-conforming to laws and regulations
Conflict of Interest: In this context a worker allows his or her personal interest to override the
official obligation.
Construction Industry: This comprises businesses involved in building infrastructure like roads,
bridges, houses, office blocks, seaports and airports, stadia, to mention but a few.
Development: Expansion/growth
Economic block- Economic section/aspects
Economic development strategy-approach to economic development
Economics- the study on how to satisfy the unlimited yearning for goods and services in a world
of limited or scarce supply of resources.
Entrepreneur - is one who is the risk bearer, has the capacity economically to produce goods and
services; organizes and supervises production; and introduces new methods and new products, and
searches for new materials.
Entrepreneurship- Entrepreneurship is an attempt at creating value through recognition of
business opportunities, management of risk-taking appropriate to the opportunities, and through

233
the communicative and management skills to mobilize human, financial and material resources
necessary to bring a project to fruition.
Environment- Surroundings

Ethical compromise- giving concession on the principles or standards guiding human conduct

Ethics- are the principles or standards guiding human conduct. They are moral rules which
determine the right or wrong of a behavior.

External environment - is made up of factors that may spell profound threats or new
opportunities for a business.
Extractive Industry: This is a group of business firms whose primary activities involve mining,
fishing, forestry, farming, quarrying, drilling, etc.

Fair dealing: Business operators should not take undue advantage or exert undue influence on
people through manipulation, concealment, abuse of privilege or confidential information,
misrepresentation of material facts, fraudulent behaviour or any other unfair dealing practice.
Feasibility- making projections to include profitability analysis.

Feasibility study is a preliminary study undertaken to determine and document the viability of a
project.
Finance function is to formulate policies ensuring that the most effective use is made of the
financial resources of the organization.

Financial Statement Integrity: Business ethics states that a company should follow strict
accounting principles and standards to report financial information accurately and completely.

Globalization- is the integration of economies with regards to market for goods, factors of
production and technology.

Honesty and Fairness: Where dishonesty and inequity become the norm in a business organisation
as they deal with the stakeholders.
Human Resources (HR): deal with people at work and their relationship within the working
environment.
Inflation/High Cost of Doing Business: Inflation is the pervasive and sustained rise in the
aggregate level of prices measured by an index of the cost of various goods and services
Internal environment- The internal environment of business is made up of all the physical and
social factors within the confine of the business, which impart strengths or cause weaknesses of a
strategic nature and are taken directly into consideration in the decision-making behaviour of the
business
International monetary fund- Prescribes, inspires, and provides funds

International trade- is the trade between nations of the world. It is trade between individual
firms and the government of the countries.
Irregular Power Supply: Most businesses currently operate on generators almost twenty-four
hours daily.
Management- controlling/supervising
Manufacturing Industry: This is composed of businesses whose primary purpose is to convert
items (goods) in the crude state to a more useful state.
Marketing function involves the identification of consumer needs which initiates the business
cycle.

234
Mixed Economy- is a system where there is a blend of some elements of both market and
command economies in answering the three fundamental economic questions.
NEEDS- National Economic Empowerment and Development Strategy (NEEDS) was a strategic
socio-economic and political development framework
New Partnership for Africa’s Development- New Partnership for Africa’s Development
(NEPAD) is a vision and strategic framework for Africa’s socioeconomic and political
transformation put in place by the African Union to harness the energy of all African country and
refocus their development strategies with the aim of achieving rapid growth and development.

Nigerian Economy- an economic system that is in between a capitalist (free market) economy
and a socialist (pure planned) economy.

Opportunities- are possibilities of what can be done and where effectiveness is possible, the
benefits that are likely to accrue from pursuing your vision.

Organic functions- major components of a business; marketing, production, finance and human
resources.

Organization’s strength- The internal strengths include a company’s core competencies,


corporate capabilities and resources that provide the basis for your strategy, e.g. workforce,
decision making process, flexible board, good working environment, and financial capability.
Organizational behavior- is the manifestation of the various forces and influences operating in
the internal environment of an organization.

Organizational resources- these are man, materials, machines and money are utilized in the
most judicious manner to achieve optimal results, with minimal use of time.

Organization-an establishment or a system of government


Poor Infrastructure: Facilities such as roads, rail, air transport, schools, health facilities, water,
etc, if not in good shape will affect everyone whether a businessperson or not.

Privatization is the selling of government owned economic assets to private investors or the
transfer by government of its equity interests in state-owned enterprises or commercial enterprises
to private investors by way of direct sale.

Production is the process of converting raw materials into finished products.

Respect in the Workplace: Business ethics emphasizes the establishment of a work environment
in which all individuals are treated with respect and dignity.

Safety Policy: In an ethical organisation, the safety of the workers and customers is paramount.
The company should cultivate safety practices and put in place measures of protection and
insurance policy.
Self-employment- means owning your own business alone or in partnership with others or with
members of your family. It is the alternative to wage employment

Service Industry: The service industry does not produce physical goods, yet it is very productive
through services which are demanded and paid for by consumers and businesses alike, for
examples entertainment and recreation, hotels and lodging, laundry, and general cleaning, etc.

235
Social responsibility- is an obligation of the organization to act in ways that serve both its own
organic interests and the interests of its many external stakeholders

Socialism- under a socialist economic system, individuals own their own human capital and the
government owns most other non-human resources,

Socialism: Under a socialist economic system, individuals own their own human capital, and the
government owns most other non-human resources, i.e., most of the major factors of production
are owned by the state.

Sole proprietorship- is a type of business that is wholly owned by one person

Statutes: A formal written enactment of a legislative authority that governs a local government,
state, or country.

Strength- is the ability, resources, weakness of the competitor or the opposition. The internal
strengths include a company’s core competencies, corporate capabilities and resources that provide
the basis for your strategy, e.g. workforce, decision making process, flexible board, good working
environment, and financial capability.
Threats- are changes in a business environment usually in the PEST forces which are pitfalls,
dangers, variation, and exceptions that are present in an environment.
Unstable Government Policy: Government policies are often unstable and inconsistent especially
in the past because of political instability.

Wage employment: Working for someone, an organisation or a company and getting paid for the
work done.

Weaknesses of an organisation is its failures, defeats (what other people do better than you),
losses and inability to match up with the dynamic situation of the growth of change. This
includes the critical parts of your business you must strengthen or hide from your competitors.

236

You might also like